Gregg Katzman's Comic Reviews

Reviewer For: Comic Vine Reviews: 642
8.3Avg. Review Rating

8
A+X #5

Mar 6, 2013

If you want a little break from the serious and emotionally compelling titles, this issue is absolutely worth purchasing. It's a short read that'll relentlessly tickle your funny bone and massage your eyes with it's delightfully unique and vivid panels. Plus, it has Doop. Everyone loves Doop, yes?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
A+X #12

Sep 25, 2013

The latest A X pretty much accomplishes what it sets out to do and that's offer a fair dose of levity and fun. It didn't split my sides or ever make me burst into laughter, but both team-ups were a pretty good time and I'd recommend picking it up to those who are particularly attached to these characters. While Beast and Wonder Man's team-up delivers bigger jokes and way more randomness, I found myself enjoying Captain America and Jubilee's mission more, primarily due to the more personalized message behind it and, of course, nazi vampires getting whooped.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Action Comics (2011): Futures End #1

Sep 3, 2014

Is this a mandatory read for FUTURES END? No, it doesn't appear to be, but it's still an engrossing experience which focuses on what Superman stands for without actually having the Kryptonian in a majority of the pages. It can be a little too blunt with its message at times, but it's still a good message overall and well worth reading if you're one of the people who wonders why Superman has fans. People not following FUTURES END will feel a little left in the dark, but overall, it doesn't take too much from the narrative and still feels like a satisfying and mostly stand alone read. However, whether it'll inspire you to continue reading FUTURES END is a whole different story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Adventures Of Superman (2013) #28

Nov 5, 2013

Just like with INJUSTICE #30, this issue aims to remind people why they not only love Superman, but also respect him. It's a quick read but it's certain to lift your spirits and put a smile on your face. Seeing as so many other titles we follow are full of death, despair and darkness, it's refreshing to enjoy a spirited one-shot which will remind you why these fictional characters are worth admiring. For just $0.99, I absolutely recommend this heartwarming read to any Superman fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Age of Ultron #3

Mar 27, 2013

Oh my, Bendis has gone all M. Night Shyamalan on us with that ending -- Sixth Sense M. Night, not The Village M. Night, that is. The overall narrative has been taking baby steps up until now. We're hit with a huge and most definitely intriguing reveal. At this point we already have plenty of characters with legitimately interesting stories established, so here's hoping Bendis decides to move forward with the key plots instead of introducing more and more elements. As someone who has been mostly disappointed with Marvel's last few events, I can say I'm honestly enjoying this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Age of Ultron #4

Apr 3, 2013

Incredibly mixed artwork and way too many moments that made me scratch my head weighed down this issue. That said, I am glad the story is finally taking huge steps -- I just wish said steps were going in a different direction. Bendis does indeed have plenty of excellent work on his resume, so I have to assume this next chapter will be dedicated to making sense of all of this. Why is Rulk there? How is Ultron communicating from the future? What plan will Marc and Natasha reveal? I really hope these are the topics that take up the core of the next issue and not more landscapes -- they look solid, but we've been given more than our fair share by now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Alien vs. Predator: Fire and Stone #1

Oct 8, 2014

I know it's such a cliche thing to say, but ALIEN VS. PREDATOR: FIRE AND STONE #1 really has just about everything you'd want from an AvP experience. Technically, we don't see the two iconic aliens square off just yet, but there's a bunch of graphic action, the visuals ooze the perfect atmosphere, and the story has me anxious to learn more. Bloody, great looking, and full of intrigue... what more do you really want from an AvP comic? To top it off, the ending leaves us with quite a teaser. Let's just say the next chapter has the potential for a lot of fan service. ALIEN VS PREDATOR: FIRE AND STONE brings all of the sci-fi madness you'd expect from it and I can't wait for the next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Aliens: Fire and Stone #1

Sep 24, 2014

ALIENS: FIRE AND STONE #1 is light on plot and character but deliciously heavy on horror and reminds us just how frightening the xenomorphs are. The story may not have that much weight just yet, but it's revealed some connections to the greater narrative and drops a hint or two which has me intrigued. Odds are you'll breeze through this read since it's basically one extended chase scene, but if you're a fan of the franchise, you'll have a good time watching these humans attempt to survive and it'll likely leave you wanting more. I mean, how can you not after the teaser at the end?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Aliens: Fire and Stone #2

Oct 29, 2014

ALIENS: FIRE AND STONE #2 thrives because of the gripping artwork and legitimately interesting mystery it's building. We're finally starting to get back into what happened in the movie and receive some proper follow-up. Whether we'll get any satisfying answers has yet to be seen, but this second issue makes some very interesting developments and leaves me wanting more. The drama between the human survivors isn't compelling and that takes away from the better scenes, but this is still a book that's full of thrills, intrigue, and some mighty fine looking art.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
All-New Captain America #2

Dec 17, 2014

ALL-NEW CAPTAIN AMERICA #2 may be talking a familiar narrative, but it's handling it extremely well and still manages to surprise you. The creative team continues to make sure there's plenty of spectacle and huge stakes as they takes steps to make HYDRA a bigger threat while making this a character-driven experience, too. This is all about just how challenging it must be for Sam Wilson to take on an enormous responsibility and it's being presented in an incredibly entertaining way. You're really missing out on a good story if you're skipping this just because it isn't Steve Rogers in the costume. Seriously, you do know he'll eventually be back and this is a good way to give another character some much-needed depth, right?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Apocalypse Al #1

Feb 5, 2014

We've seen the supernatural detective story a million times before, but Straczynski's able to create a pretty unique and fun premise with this one. The jokes may not be consistently strong and the story isn't all that compelling at the moment, but he's able to create an alluring world and ends it on a note that's likely to make you want to see what'll happen next. It's certainly an interesting start for this limited series and, for $2.99, I'll return to see where he takes us next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Armor Hunters: Bloodshot #1

Jul 23, 2014

ARMOR HUNTERS: BLOODSHOT is off to a strong start. It has a great spotlight on the titular character and goes above and beyond to illustrate the fact he's so much more than a marksman with a healing factor. On top of that, it's mostly new reader friendly and accomplishes this without taking a toll on pre-existing fans. It may not feel like a mandatory read for the event, but it's already accomplishing more than enough to justify its connection to ARMOR HUNTERS (and UNITY). If you want to see why so many of us think Bloodshot's a cool character and get a good glimpse into what's currently going on in the Valiant universe, this is definitely a solid place to start. Once you're sold on the premise, you should of course go back and read ARMOR HUNTERS #1 & #2!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Armor Hunters: Harbinger #1

Jul 30, 2014

ARMOR HUNTERS: HARBINGER #1 has a whole lot of characters, yet they're still able to make it new reader friendly (something Valiant continues to impress with) and strike us with a haunting, emotional, and character-driven opening chapter. It certainly feels like an introductory and buildup issue, but now that all of the pieces are apparently in place, things are sure to get even more interesting. Needless to say, this is worthy of your attention if you've been interested in Valiant's psiots.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Arrow: Season 2.5 #1

Oct 8, 2014

ARROW SEASON 2.5 #1 doesn't feel mandatory, but doesn't feel like filler, either. Given the fact Guggenheim's writing, the comic does great work duplicating the show's tone and the characters' voices. There's bits of levity throughout and the action's executed very well, but these moments of fun don't overshadow the villainous plot that's brewing, either. Casual fans of the show likely won't be won over, but if you're really loving team Arrow's adventures and feel like you can't get enough of their tales, then this is most certainly worth checking out. The fact they don't look all that much like their respective actors may be somewhat distracting, though.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Avengers (2010) #33

Nov 7, 2012

While THE AVENGERS definitely isn't a bad book, it's by no means a great one either. For me, it falls somewhere in the middle. Bendis's ability to craft natural flowing and light hearted conversations is alluring and Janet's return is a solid hook, but the antagonist and his agenda isn't anything special... and that happens to be soaking up a good deal of the panel time. Hopefully the story with Lord Gouzar takes an unexpected turn or wraps up quickly.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Avengers Arena #2

Dec 17, 2012

We've already seen who's standing on Day 29, and while that scene was intense and looked great, it definitely takes a bit away from the experience. We know that no matter how terrible things may look, those 2 are in it for the long run. That detracts from the experience a bit and also makes me wonder what Hopeless' long term plans for the title are. What comes after Murder World?Those premature concerns aside, Hopeless and Walker are crafting an engaging story in spite of the premise being blatantly taken from the likes of The Hunger Games and Battle Royale. There's a lot of heart behind these characters (even if it's being addressed one at a time) and I'm cautiously optimistic to see how this will play out.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Avengers Arena #3

Jan 9, 2013

At this point you probably already have your mind made up about this title. If you're a big fan of AVENGERS ACADEMY or RUNAWAYS, odds are you're super pissed off that your favorite characters are being killed off (and believe it's just for shock value). If you fall into that category, then there's really no reason for you to pick this up because it's more of the same. Nothing here will win you over and you'd really just be spending $2.99 to complain. Save the cash and let Marvel know you don't like it by not purchasing it. It's really that simple.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Avengers Arena #5

Feb 27, 2013

If you're not a fan of this one, nothing here's going to win you over and you should just save your money. That said, I know you'll be following along to know if one of your favorites dies, so I'll go ahead and tell you: no one dies in this issue. But if you're enjoying the series or at least interested in it, then odds are you'll find this to be an okay chapter. It's heavy on amazing visuals and takes a few small steps to move the overall narrative forward while providing some fairly amusing banter. I'm sure the "they're in virtual reality!" believers will be happy to know that theory is briefly brought up in the issue, too.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Avengers Arena #9

May 8, 2013

For the crowd who hates this book based on the premise: I understand why, but if you don't like what Dennis Hopeless is doing to the characters you love, please speak with your wallet. Ranting about it on the internet will accomplish nothing if you're still shelling out $2.99 for each issue. To Marvel, that says you're enjoying this concept and that completely negates what you're trying to accomplish, doesn't it? So please, if you loathe it, don't spend a penny on it. You of course have every right to complain on the internet, too... just make sure you're not financially supporting what you hate. It's that simple, folks.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Avengers Arena #10

Jun 5, 2013

For the most part, this book usually has me down the middle. I enjoyed the Arcade-focused issue but aside from that, everything has been rather "meh" for me. I understand some of you loathe the premise of this book and if that's the case, this issue will likely make you want to flip a table or smash your keyboard. Needless to say, avoid it at costs and don't spend a dime on it. However, if you've been digging the premise, odds are you'll have a blast with the action packed developments. But for me? My personal gripes and frustration over a few decisions drop this issue to two stars.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Avengers Arena #12

Jul 10, 2013

As I said above, calling this the conclusion of a story is very misleading. In fact, it doesn't really wrap anything up except for Apex no longer being an immediate threat. If anything, it's primarily an opening for the next chapter, and based on the cliffhanger and "next" tease, it's sure to bring gigantic changes to the book's status quo. But, like I also stated above, it's understandable to be highly skeptical of this glimmer of hope and it's probably not enough to pull back fans who have walked away. Ultimately, it's Kevin Walker's commendable art which boosts this book from 2 stars to 3 stars for me. If you've been enjoying the ride, odds are you'll eat this one up, too. For everyone else, it all comes down to how you'll react to the huge development.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Avengers Assemble #8

Oct 17, 2012

I can honestly only recommend this issue if you're really excited for Bendis's upcoming GUARDIANS OF THE GALAXY run. In the end it's essentially a prequel to the book. It puts Thanos in the Elders' custody, explains why Iron Man wants to tag along (spoiler alert: because he really wants to) and details who the antagonists will be in the title (Brotherhood of the Badoon). Otherwise, spend the $3.99 elsewhere.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Avengers Undercover #5

Jun 11, 2014

Honestly, I'm left feeling down the middle about this latest chapter. On one hand, I love the artwork and, for the most part, it's a steadily engaging issue. But on the other hand, I can't help but feel as though this development is moving along a little too quickly and not focusing on the entire cast nearly as much as it should. That said, at least two strong developments are put in motion, so there's a decent enough hook to keep me around for the next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Avengers Undercover #6

Jun 25, 2014

This standalone issue about Death Locket does an effective job giving us a look inside her head and, in turn, gives us a stronger connection to the character. Even though we all know Death Locket can't kill Captain America (that would create just a few continuity issues, no?), Hopeless does a good job making the situation a gripping conflict for her. We know she won't pull the trigger and that'll be the end of Steve Rogers, but will she try and take the shot? I was legitimately glued to these pages to see what would happen next and overall, I was mostly pleased with how that situation went down. Sure, it's very odd that she now looks way older and the conclusion felt way too drastic, but it's still a thoroughly enjoyable read which captured my interest and gave me a better understanding of Death Locket.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
AVX: Consequences #1

Oct 10, 2012

This first chapter does an able job of establishing the characters we're going to focus on and lays the groundwork for what could eventually become a very engaging story. Even if you weren't fond of AvX (and let's be real.. many weren't), this is still worth checking out if you're interested in how the event will change the lives of a few primary characters. Certainly not the most compelling start, but by no means bad either.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Axis: Carnage #1

Oct 29, 2014

I'll be totally honest with you, Carnage has never been one of my favorite Spider-Man villains. Am I interested in the red symbiote? Sure, but he's never ranked up there with the likes of Eddie Brock or Kraven the Hunter. This first issue though? It made me fall in love with the character and kept me entertained. Yes, many of us have event fatigue, but AXIS is exactly what this Spider-Man foe needed. Watching him try to be a hero is priceless and it kept me smiling whenever he was on the page. I'm really looking forward to more of this because AXIS: CARNAGE is a twisted delight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Axis: Carnage #2

Nov 19, 2014

AXIS: CARNAGE is legitimately hilarious and so much fun. Yes, the plot isn't anything special and the time away from Carnage makes you wish you never left the maniacal symbiote's side, but when we are observing Carnage, it's such a good time and full of amazing silliness. This may not have the level of the blood and darkness you'd expect from a Carnage story, but it more than makes up for that with some excellent comedy as we watch Carnage put in one very awkward situation after another. When all is said and done, you know Carnage will eventually go back to his old ways, but this limited series sure is making me wish that won't happen any time soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Axis: Carnage #3

Dec 10, 2014

An extremely funny and hugely entertaining limited series comes to an okay conclusion. The visuals are still a blast and there's a decent laugh or two along the way, but the theme doesn't really resonate and it feels like a pretty basic way to wrap things up for this story. If you enjoyed the previous two chapters, you owe it to yourself to see how this all comes to an end; just don't expect to love it nearly as much as the other issues. Hopefully this isn't the last spotlight inverted Carnage will receive. This limited series proves there's potential for a lot of fun with this character.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman (2011) #23.4

Sep 25, 2013

Bane's issue has all of the ingredients that should make me love it. Bane's my favorite villain, Graham Nolan provides the visuals and I really dig a lot of Peter J. Tomasi's work (I can't praise his opening BATMAN AND ROBIN story enough). Unfortunately, when all was said and done, I ended up feeling like the issue was just covering the basics and never really doing anything more than that. It randomly throws in Bane's origin story for those who don't know him well and everything else leading up to ARKHAM WAR plays out basically how you'd expect it to. It's not a bad comic -- it just doesn't really do much to make it standout, either.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman / Superman (2013) #6

Dec 4, 2013

The second issue of BATMAN/SUPERMAN's latest story arc is a great dose of popcorn entertainment. "Boss Fight" is definitely an appropriate name for this issue because it's basically one big ol' brawl between powerhouses. Seriously, if you want to just sit back and appreciate some solid looking chaos, then this is well worth your attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman / Superman (2013) #7

Jan 8, 2014

BATMAN/SUPERMAN #7 is a good looking dose of popcorn entertainment. The plot is very standard, everything is wrapped up a bit easily and the entire premise may even be too out there for some of you, but it's still an enjoyable ride and there's a nice amount of heart tossed in there as well. This is absolutely an arc that would translate especially well to an animated movie. It may not grab onto your emotions, but it does a damn fine job presenting all of the frenetic chaos in a delightfully cinematic fashion and there's a nice underlying message, too.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #13

Oct 10, 2012

BATMAN & ROBIN continues to prove it's one of the best Bat-family books DC has to offer. While the unfolding plot isn't particularly interesting, the dynamic between Bruce and Damian once again serves as more than enough to keep me coming back for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman and Robin (2011) #14

Nov 14, 2012

BATMAN & ROBIN started off strong but has been on a gradual decline ever since. The stories feel rushed and, despite Gleason appealing to the eyes and Tomasi doing fine with dialogue, there's no real payoff. I was pretty torn here between 2 and 3 stars (and if I could give half I'd absolutely make it 2.5), but in the end this really was a lackluster story jammed into 2 issues, so 2 stars felt more appropriate. There are certainly redeeming qualities to be found, but overall I was disappointed. I'm sticking around because I'm confident in Tomasi's capabilities. He knocked it out of the park with the first story and there's glimmers of brilliance with the parent/child relationship (especially since he said he basis it off his own interactions with his kid), it's just a matter of hoping he can reach that level once again. In the meantime though, I'm not happy to say that this is a story you can skip. Here's hoping the next story's better.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Batman and Robin (2011) #16

Jan 16, 2013

This is without question the best issue of BATMAN AND ROBIN since the fantastic Nobody arc. Both the script and artwork are top-notch. The final product is a brilliantly entertaining issue that provides great popcorn entertainment and a deeper look into Damian's feelings towards his father. Now we're left speculating over the twist taking place in each 'Death of the Family' issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Batman and Robin (2011) #17

Feb 13, 2013

BATMAN & ROBIN is once again on a roll. With top-notch panels that'll drop your jaw and a script that'll evoke quite a few emotions, 'Life is But a Dream' is a must read for fans of the Bat-family. Tomasi's handling of Bruce and Damian's relationship has been nothing short of brilliant as of late.Please, Grant Morrison, don't harm this adorable character!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Batman and Robin (2011) #18

Mar 13, 2013

Whaaat? No, I'm not tearing up. There's... there's just something in my eye, that's all. Seriously though, BATMAN AND ROBIN #18 is a huge accomplishment. The impact of death in this medium has certainly been reduced, but this issue defies that belief on every single page. You'll feel Batman's excruciating pain, and that is a truly amazing feat from this creative team.Once you're done with the issue, take a moment or two to gaze at the image from an older issue below. Try not to shed a tear. Go on, I dare you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #20

May 8, 2013

Tomasi and Gleason continue to prove why I love this title. Filled with emotion and a unique look, this series is handling the tragic events over in BATMAN, INCORPORATED exceptionally well. Despite me being mostly uninterested in Kelley, it's obvious she's going to be a factor in this book for at least the near future. I just hope this opportunity is used to illustrate more memories of Damian and a part of his life we never knew about instead of citing famous quotes and having her fill the void he's left. Regardless, I'm optimistic about Tomasi's plans for this title and this is yet another excellent chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #21

Jun 19, 2013

This issue definitely brings the goods when it comes to visuals and action, but I thought it was far less absorbing than the previous encounters. The proposal Batgirl makes is the best part of the dynamic between the two, but for me, that doesn't overcome all of the exposition and a lack of development from Batman. Even if you're a massive Batgirl fan, I imagine you'll find this read somewhat tedious until the heated conclusion. Unfortunately, it's just not as compelling as the previous issues and it lacks the emotional impact they've delivered. Certainly not a bad issue -- just a bit of a letdown for me.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #23.1

Sep 4, 2013

If you're a fan of Two-Face or at least curious about the character, I'd recommend giving this a shot. It's not a very elaborate look at the character and doesn't bother to expand upon his history, but it does manage to offer a pretty entertaining story and decent insight into how he operates. Sure, we all know he flips a coin to make up his mind, but this illustrates the measures he'll take after the coin has landed... even if he thinks he's being a good guy.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #24

Oct 16, 2013

The cliffhanger definitely doesn't pack a punch, but that's most likely because this is an introduction that'll serve as a better read when collected. Tomasi has delivered the basics of the story and revealed a bit of Harvey's new origin, but the burden of justifying why this story deserves 5 issues falls on the next chapter. It's certainly not a bad issue -- there's a lot of potential here -- and Gleason's illustrations are always appreciated, but right now the bigger picture is somewhat lacking.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #25

Nov 20, 2013

Tomasi's decision to focus on McKillen and Batman generates some amusing material and very entertaining bits of action. Gleason's still doing great work with the visuals, but the biggest problem is the story isn't making any strong strides, especially with Dent. It's not a bad story, but right now it just isn't all that engrossing, either. Hopefully there's some big developments in part three.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #26

Dec 18, 2013

Alight, things just got VERY interesting. Prior to this issue, I've been down the middle with BATMAN AND TWO-FACE. Two-Face's new origin story felt uninspired compared to the original and, despite being tough and knowing Bruce when he was a kid, Erin McKillen just hasn't been that interesting, especially compared to all of the elaborate characters in Batman's rogues gallery. This issue, however, changes all of that and adds some very needed emotional connection to the story and finally gives Two-Face more time to shine.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #27

Jan 22, 2014

It took The Big Burn a couple of issues to get rolling, but now the story is definitely winning me over. Tomasi's crafting a legitimately interesting bond between this trio and he's filling the script with some seriously satisfying Batman moments for Gleason to create. BATMAN & ROBIN is most certainly back on track.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #28

Feb 19, 2014

Love or hate what goes down, this is an undeniably massive issue for Two-Face and it's certain to get some very passionate conversations going. However, the forceful nature of this issue's developments are countered by the fact that Dent didn't feel like a big player in this story -- at least not to me, that is. It feels like a somewhat abrupt conclusion with Dent and that the truly critical elements with him were saved up until the very end. Regardless, opinions are certain to be mixed on this one and I find myself primarily left down the middle on it, but at least most of us are likely to agree that Gleason and company created some legitimately commendable images in this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #34

Aug 20, 2014

As a big Damian Wayne fan, I'm beyond happy to say this is turning out to be a legitimately engaging and thoroughly entertaining story. It hasn't quite hit us with the level of emotion we've seen in some of BATMAN AND ROBIN's previous story arcs, but you can really feel the buildup and I can't wait to see what the creative team has in store for us with this one. Fingers crossed this concludes with Damian's return!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #35

Oct 15, 2014

Robin Rises may not be as compelling as Born to Kill (at least not yet) and it may not be as emotional as the five stages arc, but one thing is clear: Robin Rises is a blockbuster. The action is non-stop and exciting; the scope is massive; and there's plenty of jaw-dropping visuals. Batman's done messing around and it's exciting to think that there's still so much left for us to witness. It's just too bad the reveal on Apokolips is such a head-scratcher, but I guess we'll just have to wait and see what this story has in store for the villain. After this issue's developments with the Bat-family and getting a taste of what this armor is capable of, you can bet I'm anxious to read what'll go down next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #36

Nov 19, 2014

This chapter is called "Chaos" and it most definitely lives up to its title. This one's incredibly fast-paced and refuses to slow down. It's non-stop excitement as we see Batman being seriously intimidating and formidable and then the story ends on a note that'll make you wish you could see what happens next right away. Everyone on the creative team is really going all-out to produce a story that's a total blast. If you want to see Batman completely unleashing and overcoming every single threat that's put in his way, you need to read this series. Seriously, it's pretty much one big and totally thrilling action scene.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #37

Dec 17, 2014

BATMAN AND ROBIN #37 is a huge amount of fun that's filled with enjoyably over-the-top moments. This is the kind of story that just demands to be turned into a DC animated movie. It refuses to slow down and never fails to entertain with ridiculously crazy and gripping action. Sure, it mostly plays out how you'd expect it to, so that means it's unlikely to surprise or stun you, but you can tell the creative team put everything they have into this one and wanted to make sure readers have a blast with it. The big clash doesn't disappoint and the adventure has just the right amount of heart. Robin Rises has been non-stop fun and I'm really looking forward to ROBIN RISES: ALPHA.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Batman and Robin (2011) #38

Jan 21, 2015

The return of the Dynamic Duo turns out to be a surprisingly insightful and emotional read. After all of the craziness and emotion this series has offered (and not to mention the funny cover), it seemed fair to assume this would be an amusing look at how Damian's using his new powers to fight crime in Gotham and, in turn, how Bruce is struggling to deal with the new scenario. While we do get a fair amount of the latter, the focus on Damian's new situation is surprisingly compelling and, best of all, it often tells the story by showing you something instead of bluntly spelling it out. This one really does offer a perfect blend of action, humor and heart. BATMAN AND ROBIN #38 is a great comic and a fantastic way of reminding us just how terrific the handling of Batman's son has been in this title. Welcome back, little dude.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #39

Feb 18, 2015

BATMAN AND ROBIN #39 is a good time. It doesn't feel like anything big is brewing on the horizon and it may not have any truly standout moments, but it's a nice example of how well Tomasi can write Damian and certainly proof that the art team does a great job with the kid's expressions and the various locations. It's looking like the next issue has the potential to be a huge amount of fun, so hopefully the capitalize on that potential. Oh, and is anyone else wondering when we'll see Talia again?

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Batman and Robin (2011) #40

Mar 25, 2015

Tomasi and Gleason's BATMAN AND ROBIN entered my life with a dramatic, gripping, and emotional story. Now, it's leaving with a fun and moving story that focuses 100% on the father-son dynamic. I'm guessing readers not all that passionate about Damian probably won't enjoy this one as much as I did, but as someone who's been with the series since the very first issue, I can't help but feel like this is an amazing way to conclude the creative team's time with the two heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Batman and Robin (2011) Annual #1

Jan 30, 2013

'Death of the Family' has placed such a dark and dreary mood over all of the Bat books. Alfred and Damian's future are definitely uncertain in that event. While this is by no means a bad thing, seeing them at a happier time and the amazingly warming tone of this issue is a very welcome change of pace. BATMAN & ROBIN ANNUAL #1 looks good, is packed with great comedic and action scenes and is by far one of the most heartwarming comics I've read in a long time. I dare to say it's Peter J. Tomasi's best issue in the series. Damian, you're now my favorite DC character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011): Futures End #1

Sep 17, 2014

BATMAN AND ROBIN: FUTURES END #1 doesn't feel like a mandatory or even important read, but it's still a very satisfying and engrossing one. The look at Batman and Robin in the future left me legitimately interested in seeing more and the artwork impressed. The potential return of the Heretic offered a subtle insight into Batman and served as a good way to give us a little bit of focus on Alfred and the new Robin, too. Plus, there's a pretty brutal fight, and honestly, who doesn't love watching Batman refuse to back down, even when the odds are stacked against him? It may not be that compelling or emotional, but it's an adventure that's good for your eyes and it's most certainly entertaining.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Batman Incorporated (2012) #0

Sep 26, 2012

BATMAN INCORPORATED #0 is a must read if you're into the Batman mythos. Morrison crafts a fulfilling tale packed with plenty of action, laughs and intrigue. Irving's positively unique artwork is just icing on this Bat-family cake.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman Incorporated (2012) #4

Oct 24, 2012

This issue was pretty much a solid dose of popcorn entertainment. It's sporting a more than unique style as the action fluctuates from fun to downright painful. Throw in some sharp dialogue and an interesting cliffhanger and what you have is an issue well worth your time and money.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: Arkham Knight #1

Feb 24, 2015

Sure, they want to create a satisfying story with this series, but I'm guessing the primary goal is to make sure the upcoming video game remains on our radars and, when it comes out, we'll shell out whatever it costs to buy the game. So, does this opening chapter get me even more excited for Rocksteady's final Arkham game? Yes, I'd say it does. It thrives because it's able to embrace the city and cast we've come to know so well while also offering some great dialogue between Batman and Alfred. I'm left wanting more. I want to see Batman interacting with his other allies; I want to see which other villains will pop up and how they'll be handled; I want to see more exploration of the city I was able to glide around. And I'm left really wanting to play Arkham City all over again. ARKHAM KNIGHT is off to a strong start and it should absolutely be read by fans of the video game franchise. This doesn't feel like a blatant cash in; it feels like a passion project.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman: The Dark Knight (2011) #16

Jan 30, 2013

This certainly isn't a bad issue, but it didn't really accomplish anything that makes it stand out from the other Batman titles. Its visuals are good and it's an amusing issue but nothing about this overall plot truly lures you into its world. I'm sure big fans of The Mad Hatter will want to see more, but right now I can't strongly recommend it to everyone else, especially when BATMAN and BATMAN AND ROBIN are both doing a great job with the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batwing #15

Dec 5, 2012

There's not much that's necessarily "bad" about this issue, but my biggest gripe with the title is that it's quality pretty much falls in the middle. It's not great and it's far from bad. It's just safely cruising in "alright" territory. BATWING had a compelling start with Massacre's story but it has yet to reach that level of greatness again. Overall, it's a decent book and if you're a fan of the character it's worth following. But if you're simply searching for a new title to follow there's absolutely bettercontendersfor your cash.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Big Man Plans #1

Mar 4, 2015

BIG MAN PLANS obviously won't win everyone over, but if it does appeal to you, odds are you're going to love it and find yourself wanting the next issue right away. Part of me is even left wishing this wasn't just a limited series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Birds Of Prey (2011) #0

Sep 19, 2012

Birds of Prey's zero issue is worth checking out if you're already a fan of the title or want to learn more about the female squad. It's a thoroughly entertaining read and provides the basics to keep a firm grip on your interest. I would have liked a little more detail on the history of each character, but despite this it managed to make me want more and because of this I'll be adding it to my pull list.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Market #1

Jul 16, 2014

BLACK MARKET is off to a very interesting start and most certainly left me wanting more. The strong emphasis on ethical dilemmas is being presented very well and has opened the door to a whole lot of potential. Throw in some fitting artwork and the end result is a smart and legitimately intriguing debut chapter that approaches a world of superheroes in a new way. BLACK MARKET is now on my radar and I'm very anxious to see where this story will go next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Market #2

Aug 20, 2014

BLACK MARKET #2's well written, visually stimulating and even exciting at times, but it feels like there isn't any noteworthy progress until the final page. Establishing a better connection to these characters is obviously a critical part of this title and this chapter does accomplish that with Bruiser, but we never really received a proper follow-up to the last chapter's solid cliffhanger. It isn't the biggest complaint around, but it is noticeable and leaves me anxious to see the dynamic between the two brothers expand. How long can Denny keep Ray in the dark? Still, the script has me interested in these characters and seeing where this path will take them. Barbiere's story is loaded with potential and this chapter definitely shows signs of that.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #0.2014

Feb 26, 2014

If you're really passionate about the H.A.R.D. Corps, then you're sure to be satisfied as co-writers Christos Gage and Joshua Dysart take your hand and walk you through the organization's dark, harsh and bloody history. However, odds are you'll find yourself down the middle if you're part of the crowd that thinks Bloodshot has taken a backseat in the title. That said, Gage and Dysart continue to impress as co-writers and, despite there being a whole lot of artists, the visuals remain consistent. However, whether this is worth purchasing will be entirely up to just how interested you are in the H.A.R.D. Corps' history.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #14

Sep 18, 2013

Bloodshot's going on an all-new journey and this creative team has kicked it off with a whole lot of potential. With sharp writing, engaging character building and solid artwork, this definitely feels like the start of something great. It's clearly intended to be an ideal jumping on point and totally accomplishes that. Seriously, it's 100% new reader friendly, serving as an introduction to all of these characters and still managing to craft an interesting story. If you've ever considered diving into Bloodshot's world, this is the perfect time to do so.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #15

Oct 16, 2013

While their first issue introduced us to everyone, this chapter picks up the speed big time and it's incredibly engrossing the entire time. Not for a second did my interest even remotely fade and the creative team has done a superb job leaving us on a note that makes me beyond anxious to read the next issue. Relatively minor gripes aside, this is a really good issue and I can't recommend enough to anyone and everyone who's searching for an action title.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #16

Nov 20, 2013

BLOODSHOT & THE H.A.R.D. CORPS takes a twisted turn and has left us on one helluva note. It's a cliffhanger where I honestly have no idea what direction it'll take and I'm itching to find out. Dysart and Gage have taken such a violent character and turned his title into something legitimately fun without sacrificing who he is. If you want a book that's incredibly well-written, full of interesting characters and all kinds of crazy action, this is it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #17

Dec 18, 2013

You know all of those action movies you really like from the '80s and '90s? BLOODSHOT AND H.A.R.D. CORPS is basically like those, except the plot's actually good and the dialogue is legitimately engaging. Yes, it would have been nice to give a little more attention to the other relatively new characters, but for what it's worth, Dysart/Gage have done a fine job building an emotional connection to these characters while also delivering plenty of spectacle. It may not be as gritty as the previous run, but it makes up for that with some truly excellent writing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #18

Jan 8, 2014

Valiant's promoting this as "must read" and I agree with them. If you've been asking yourself, "What's a Bloodshot?" this is the issue to check out. Despite being a jumping on point, it's crafted in a way that appeals to both new and longtime fans. New fans won't feel lost because all of the basics are thoroughly covered, and pre-existing fans won't be bored because, as usual, it's a solid script and hugely entertaining. The new look will probably be hit or miss for some, but even if you're not the biggest fan of the visuals, the strong script and action-packed developments are sure to win you over. You want a team book with exciting action, good writing and fun powers? Look no further than Bloodshot.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #22

May 14, 2014

This issue is a bit of a double-edge sword. It's the beginning of the end for the series, and even though we know Bloodshot will play a role in other titles (ARMOR HUNTERS and UNITY), it's disappointing knowing his series is racing towards its conclusion. While this is a bummer, it doesn't counter the fact this is an excellent issue and a ridiculously strong start for the title's final story. The opening chapter is thrilling, packs some mighty fine visuals, and ends on a note that'll make you want to see what happens next right away. I just hope the H.A.R.D. Corp members will get more time to shine before this all wraps up (especially Vagabond). If you've ever wanted to check out Bloodshot's world, this is the issue you need to get. It's a jumping on spot and, thanks to a thorough recap page, you won't feel left in the dark at all.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #23

Jun 11, 2014

Bloodshot's book usually revolves around character development and shocking action, but this one is all about bringing some big change to this universe. Sure, there's some action and a wee bit of focus on Flatline and Palmer, but ultimately, it's the final course of events that'll really grip you. The execution of this development is awesomely cinematic and left me wondering about this universe's future. It would have been nice to see Bloodshot and some of the H.A.R.D. Corps members get a little more love, but the payoff with this plot is huge. Now it's just a matter of seeing how the follow-up is handled!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot (2012) #0

Aug 21, 2013

A solid narrative and shockingly detailed violence... what more could you honestly want from an issue of BLOODSHOT? This is a must buy for anyone who loves the series and a more than serviceable jumping on point for everyone else.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot (2012) #3

Sep 5, 2012

Writer Duane Swierczynski has been on fire with Bloodshot . It's fast paced, brutal and has a genuinely interesting plot that continues to slowly unfold. The $3.99 cover price might be off-putting for some, but I assure you it's worth every penny.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot (2012) #5

Nov 13, 2012

If you're looking for an action heavy title, it really doesn't get much better than BLOODSHOT. It has been consistently brutal, delivers occasional laughs to help lighten the tone and is slowly picking apart the pieces to a large and honestly interesting conspiracy. One of these days I might dislike an issue, but until then, Duane & company continue to keep delivering the goods and I simply cannot praise this book enough. Don't hesitate, go give it a shot, action junkies.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot (2012) #6

Dec 11, 2012

If you like action heavy thrillers or things that are generally overflowing with awesome, then BLOODSHOT is the title for you. This issue has an insane amount of gory battles and it's topped off with a great conclusion. There's a lot to look forward to here, especially if you're reading HARBINGER as well. In my opinion, BLOODSHOT has consistently proven to be one of the most entertaining books on the shelves right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot (2012) #7

Jan 16, 2013

Like I said, this is a great jumping on point if you've ever been curious about BLOODSHOT. It's essentially a 101 for who he is, what his nanites can do for him and why Project Rising Spirit is clearly a conspiracy filled and twisted organization. Month after month I look forward to this book because I know it delivers the goods when it comes to insane popcorn entertainment and a well-executed plot. I'm anxious for next month's issue so we can jump back to the present and see how the modern day Harbingers react to "the Boogeyman."

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot (2012) #8

Feb 13, 2013

BLOODSHOTcontinues to prove why it's my my go-to source for popcorn entertainment. This is yet another issue that's filled with shocking action, solid visuals and an overall narrative that's steadily inching along.Is it a flawless book? No, of course not, but when I give this book 5 stars it's for the simple fact that I do indeed love each reading experience with it. There's no glaring issues with the plot (at least none that I immediately picked up), nothing jarring with the artwork and it's so entertaining that I'm sure many will also overlook the fact that technically nothing big happened in this issue.That said, it is leading to something quite big --HARBINGER WARS! The stage is slowly being set for this first crossover event and I'm really, really, really excited to see how it'll all play out. GO TEAM BLOODSHOT!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot (2012) #9

Mar 13, 2013

Have you ever said to yourself, "Gee, I wish the Bourne movies would have a baby with the big action movies of the '90s!" No? Well, it does sound pretty awesome now that you're thinking about it, right? If you agree then there's no reason to miss out on this title. It has dastardly and cowardly villains, ginormous amounts of brutal action and a lead with a whole lot of heart. I'm pumped for Bloodshot's role in 'Harbinger Wars' and you should be, too.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bloodshot (2012) #10

Apr 17, 2013

While this chapter does feel like filler, it's still sporting a thrilling action sequence, a gripping moment of vulnerability with Bloodshot, and engrossing dialogue to help give more life and a greater sense of empathy to the group of Harbingers. Sure, there's a bit of exposition thrown into the mix and it does feel a tad slow at times, but that doesn't stop this issue from leaving an impression. Kitson definitely impresses with the visuals, so I'm thrilled he'll continue with the title. BLOODSHOT continues to be the best big action book on the shelves... now it's just a matter of seeing how well they handle upcoming HARBINGER WARS moments we've already seen.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot (2012) #12

Jun 19, 2013

While the plot didn't take any big steps regarding HARBINGER WARS, it managed to successfully implement the characters and close a fairly big chapter in Bloodshot's life. Additionally, I'm really digging the moments where we can see what's going on in Bloodshot's mind and he makes a huge development in there. BLOODSHOT is Valiant's way of serving up a terrific R-rated action film once a month. Since issue 1, it has been consistent with offering twisted action, detailed panels and a legitimately engrossing adventure.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Bloodshot (2012) #13

Jul 24, 2013

"3 STARS FOR BLOODSHOT? HAS KATZMAN GONE MAD?" Fear not, Viner, it's not a bad issue -- it just has too much of a "been there, done that" feeling to it. Sure, there's two rather good scenes thrown into the mix, but the core of this book is giving us a look at what we've already seen in HARBINGER WARS #4. This issue basically hits the reset button and prepares us for the next step in Bloodshot's life, but in doing so, I feel like it rushes one character out of the picture and I wish they had a more engaging departure. Regardless, it's still an entertaining and good looking issue, it's just bogged down by a lot of backtracking.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cable and X-Force #2

Dec 19, 2012

I was genuinely torn over the score with this issue. I was inclined at first to go with 3 stars. While Hopeless is doing a good job handling each character and the overall plot is slowly unfolding, I feel as though the content here isn't enough to justify Marvel's $3.99 cover price. It's good so far, but certainly not great. Nevertheless, the art is just so damn good and that alone definitely warrants a boost from 3 to 4.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Cable and X-Force #5

Mar 6, 2013

My biggest gripe with this book is it's just not doing enough to warrant the $3.99 price tag. Sure, it has its moments here and there, but compared to other titles this just isn't as compelling or enthralling as I'd expect it to be. Cable still has his visions (which come at totally terrible times), and that lays out the ground work for the next plot. It's business as usual. The only thing that really won me over here was the witty friendship between the team's geniuses.Also, it's worth noting that the solicitations mentions the Uncanny Avengers, yet they're nowhere to be found in this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cyclops (2014) #5

Sep 24, 2014

CYCLOPS is a nice break from all of the gloom and doom going on back on Earth. Sure, there's some potential for a really impactful turn of events, but the series always manages to have a sense of fun and charm as these two bond while traveling the cosmos.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Daredevil: Dark Nights #1

Jun 5, 2013

This issue was an unexpected delight for me. I had no idea what to expect going into Murdock's latest limited-series, but after reading it I can only describe it as beautiful, engrossing, and heartfelt. I already can't wait to get my hands on the second chapter. This more "realistic" approach may not be for everyone, but I highly recommend it for everyone else. Do yourself a favor and give this issue an honest chance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil: Dark Nights #2

Jul 3, 2013

DAREDEVIL: DARK NIGHTS #2 is a well-written and fairly gripping experience. If you can't stand seeing Daredevil not at the top of his game, then you're best off avoiding this. But if you're okay with a more down to Earth, character driven tale with remarkable art, then I absolutely recommend giving this a read.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil: Dark Nights #6

Nov 6, 2013

This by no means seems like it'll go down as a must read Daredevil story, but you know what? It's a decent amount of fun, and sometimes that's all that really matters. The story isn't anything original (at least not yet) and it's your typical mobster story, but it's well-written and the chemistry between Misty and Matt is certainly amusing. If you're a big Daredevil fan and want to enjoy a bit more of the character, you should consider giving part one of "In the Name of the King" an honest shot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dawn of the Planet of the Apes #1

Nov 26, 2014

Is this a worthy addition to the story that has been established by such a great movie? Well, only time will tell, but right now it's off to a very good start! As someone who really loved Dawn of the Planet of the Apes, it's great seeing this creative team is able to duplicate the movie's tone so well. This isn't over-the-top and it instead focuses on giving us a connection to these lead characters and reminds us why we care about them. Little things like dialogue stemming from an ape's hand as they use sign language is a nice touch, as is the rougher text when they speak. It may not be stunning debut, but it treats this universe (and the reader) with respect and leaves you wanting to see where this journey will go next. I'm very excited to see what happens in the next issue, especially since we know Malcolm and Caesar won't meet for quite some time. If you really love Dawn and its characters, this should be an obvious purchase.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dawn of the Planet of the Apes #2

Dec 24, 2014

BOOM! Studios' comic feels like a proper return to the amazing franchise. Just like the movies, this is all about giving us a solid insight into its characters and watching what happens when they're faced with moral dilemmas. It treats the reader with respect and understands that it's sometimes important to show and not tell. It's a good script and the visual team creates a tone that consistently reminds us of just how intense and difficult the situation has become. A look at two totally different groups -- one human and one ape -- could have been a mess and left the book feeling unfocused, but the juggling of the two locations is being executed well and both stories entertain. Neither is outshining the other and both are doing a fine job showing us more of this world and how it's impacting both groups. We may not have a compelling bigger picture just yet, but the focus on character and the way it's all presented makes this a worthy edition to the franchise's story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dead Body Road #2

Jan 22, 2014

Look, we all know this is a story we've seen a million times before. There's a dude who wants to avenge the death of his loved one and on the other side there's a heist gone wrong and the big bad wants everything fixed. It's all familiar stuff, but as I said in 'This Week's Essential Comics,' what makes this book special is the creative team, and this issue proves that. Justin is creating a thrilling story that feels like it's straight out of a violent action movie and Scalera's art is exploding with energy. They're the perfect team to bring this kind of story to life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dead Body Road #3

Feb 26, 2014

I feel like a broken record saying this, but I simply have to point it out: yes, this is a story that isn't all that original (at least not yet, that is). It's your heist gone wrong meshed with a man who has lost his wife and now has nothing to lose as he seeks to punish the people responsible. However, the series thrives because of the creative team. Jordan refuses to slow down the pace and hits us with some massively entertaining set pieces and a consistent flow of no-nonsense dialogue. And then there's Scalera, an artist who has an uncanny ability to flood the panels with vivid energy. Together, they're creating one hell of a book. If you've fallen behind and this sounds appealing to you, you should definitely look for it when it's released as a trade.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Dead Body Road #4

Mar 26, 2014

This fourth chapter is a ridiculously entertaining read. Jordan pretty much creates a script that compliments Scalera's style and the end result is a completely gripping spectacle. The plot is still inching along (to be fair, there's a solid narrative-driven scene worked in here), but I can hardly complain because this is without question one of the best chase sequences you'll ever read in a comic. Jordan makes sure it's wicked and Scalera masterfully brings it all to life. It's savage, overflowing with intensity and is a seriously exciting experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dead Body Road #5

Apr 23, 2014

DEAD BODY ROAD is a relentless thrill ride. You may not find yourself all that invested in where the narrative will go or the fate of these characters, but you will absolutely be blown away by each and every issue. Jordan and Scalera are doing a phenomenal job hitting us with some truly exciting stuff and the experience continues to get crazier and crazier. If do want to dive into this hectic story, you''ll unfortunately feel completely lost if you hop on with issue. So if you are interested -- and you should be if you love chaotic action and heist stories -- I strongly recommend picking up the other chapters as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Dead Body Road #6

May 28, 2014

DEAD BODY ROAD is an excellent story about revenge and what it does to a person, and this savage world is filled with phenomenal artwork. The road leading to this final chapter was full of intense action, but this last issue shifts gears just a little bit to focus on fleshing out the main cast. It finally gives the strong emotional connection to Gage that I've been looking for and it delivers on this big time. But don't worry, action junkies, because Jordan, Scalera, and Dinisio still manage to pack some gripping and cinematic madness into this ending. This is a story that most definitely warrants being re-read when the collected edition is released. Thanks for the crazy ride, DEAD BODY ROAD.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadly Hands of Kung Fu #1

May 14, 2014

DEADLY HANDS OF KUNG-FU #1 is the master of setting the stage for what's to come. Benson gives us the bare basics of the narrative, briefly reminds us that yes, Shang-Chi's currently an Avenger and a beast in unarmed combat, and ends it all on a note that promises more excitement is right around the corner. It gets the job done and establishes everything in a fast-paced and enjoyable manner.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Deadly Hands of Kung Fu #2

Jun 11, 2014

Everything in me wants to love this book. I've always wanted to see more of Shang-Chi and I love Mike Benson's work with Deadpool and Moon Knight. Sadly, nothing about this issue feels unique. It's basically by the numbers and then hindered by some very inconsistent visuals. And you'd expect a book called "Deadly Hands of Kung Fu" to show off the lead's hand-to-hand abilities, right? Hopefully the narrative will become more compelling in the next issue. Even though I'm not the biggest fan around of this issue, I simply can't turn my back on Chi just yet. Here's hoping the third chapter is an improvement.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #1

Nov 6, 2012

This issue successfully serves as a great jumping on point and also provides an action packed and hysterical story that I believe new and old fans will appreciate. This creative team feels like a perfect fit for Wade and I'm very anxious to see where they'll go with him. Welcome to Marvel NOW!, Deadpool, I'm so very happy you're on-board .

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #2

Nov 21, 2012

Two issues in and DEADPOOL remains strong as Marvel's go-to book for absurdity. Seeing Deadpool face individual Presidents is sure to be a unique and creative experience as each battle (so far) is tailor-made to capitalize on their personalities. The overall plot is moving at a steady rate and Tony Moore's artwork is phenomenal. Overall, a solid start to Deadpool's new run and hopefully it'll remain at this level of quality.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #3

Dec 3, 2012

The plot remains very straight forward and that's hardly a bad thing. It's clear this story's objective is to win us over with big laughs and even bigger action, and so far it is absolutelysucceedingin that regard. I'm adoring this series, but I'm really excited to see what the comedic duo has up their sleeve for the next and allegedly darker story. They've proven they can make Deadpool kick-ass and make me laugh, but I'm curious to see how well they'll develop him and dive into his internal dilemmas. In the meantime, this is a must read if you're a fan of the Merc with a Mouth.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #4

Jan 23, 2013

Solid script by Brian Posehn and Gerry Duggan? Check. Ridiculously good art by Tony Moore and Val Staples? Check. Shirtless Abe Lincoln throwing down with Deadpool in a ring? Check. Deadool fans, this is a must read. It's packed with big laughs, hysterical and violent action, and to top it off, the book looks amazing. Do yourself a favor and read this one ASAP.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #5

Feb 20, 2013

This is a story arc where you've gotta just shut off your brain and enjoy the craziness. Otherwise, you'll findyourselfasking plenty of trivial things... like how these monkeys are still alive in space, how a dead President learned Chinese boxing since being resurrected, so on and so on. If you're looking for logic, you're in the wrong place. But if you want a book that'll make you laugh and cringe at some well illustrated violence, then DEADPOOL is worth every penny of the $2.99 cover price. I'm having a blast with this story, but I really hope the creative team has our anti-hero go down a more serious and character driven path when he's done putting the Presidents back into their graves.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #6

Mar 20, 2013

I know "WTF certified" is DC's thing, but DEADPOOL is totally borrowing it with this ending! You'll never see it coming and this is sure to keep the book hugely amusing. One of the countless reasons why CABLE & DEADPOOL worked so well is because Nathan was there to balance the tone. Without spoiling anything, I can safely say it looks like we're about to get a whole lot of that again. Considering the entertaining writing, it'll hopefully be a successful new element to the book. This first story is nothing but pure comedy and crazy action. If you're looking for a complex and deep plot, you won't be pleased. But, if you're looking for some ridiculous fun, this issue's just for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #7

Apr 3, 2013

I'm calling it right now: this is the funniest issue of 2013. I've consulted with Cable and he agrees, too. Seriously, the entire issue is dedicated to delivering big laughs and it absolutely succeeds and then some. I want to see more development from Deadpool in the primary story, but I honestly don't care if he's a goofy fool in a standalone tale -- especially if it makes me burst into laughter so frequently. Now if you'll excuse me, I have a strong urge to read DEADPOOL #11 again.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #8

Apr 24, 2013

The laughs remain strong and Mike Hawthorne is a great addition to the book, but what really sold me is the start of a new and legitimately solid narrative. Branching off in numerous directions and focusing on the bond between Wade and Preston, this plot is certainly ambitious, to say the least, and that's something worth celebrating. Sure, I do have some complaints, but overall I'm really loving this book and highly recommend it to any Wade fan willing to accept occasional downplaying of his abilities.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #9

May 8, 2013

Man, this was not a good issue for Michael! I think the plot with Preston and Vetis deserves plenty of attention, but I'd be lying if I said I wasn't a little disappointed there was no follow-up to the organ thieves. Personal gripes over Wade's morals aside, this story is a huge improvement over the first one when it comes to plot and character development. It's a bit lacking in the action department, but I think it's fair to say we had more than enough of that in the 'Undead Presidents' story, so I'm greatly appreciating the bigger focus on the overall narrative instead of stabby, stabby, boom, boom. However, I won't complain if we see Deadpool show off how lethal he is. In fact, I'd praise it. I really miss the days of Wade having the skill to give Wolverine a brutal fight. So please, bring back the skills, Gerry and Brian!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #10

May 22, 2013

In case you couldn't tell by now, I freaking LOVED this issue. It doesn't move the plot forward all that much, but it's a virtually flawless piece of popcorn entertainment. It delivers and then some when it comes to the art, ginormous laughs and cheer-worthy action. I spent $2.99 for a digital copy of this issue on ComiXology and you bet I am absolutely going to spend another $2.99 to get a physical copy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #11

Jun 12, 2013

Deadpool slipping up a few times and being taken down easily by Daredevil may not bother some of you, but it definitely takes away from the read for me. Duggan and Posehn are on the right track when it comes to filling the book with sharp dialogue and an enjoyable plot, but Deadpool's effectiveness is fluctuating too much for me. It's not enough to make me dislike the book -- not by any means -- but it is an aspect that bothers me a bit. Regardless, Hawthorne and Staples provide amazingly good visuals and, while I hate how quickly it ended, the brief scuffle between Wade and Matt was terrific before it came to an abrupt halt.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #12

Jun 26, 2013

Co-writers Gerry Duggan and Brian Posehn give Vetis' arc a terrific conclusion and it's a fitting lead into their next tale. It delivers everything I've come to expect from Deadpool's latest solo series: solid looking pages, plenty of laughs, enjoyable action and sprinkles of character development and depth from Wade. The Merc with a Mouth is in good hands. They're somewhat twisted hands... but good hands nonetheless.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #14

Aug 14, 2013

Duggan and Posehn continue to do what they do best... and that's make me laugh like a fool. They successfully bring this absurd villain to the modern era and it makes for a wildly entertaining adventure which is every bit as enjoyable as the "lost issue." It's essentially slapstick and one-liners for a vast majority of the ride, but the conclusion switches things back into a more serious direction and has me legitimately curious to see how they'll handle the next issue. I love me some purely comedic Deadpool, but I really hope the next issue will be able to incorporate a more serious tone as well because the scenario certainly calls for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #15

Aug 28, 2013

Oh, and Marvel, can we please get a plushie of the version of Deadpool on the opening page? Seriously, it's ridiculously adorable.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #16

Sep 11, 2013

Oh, and if you're one of the people who dropped this book because you weren't a fan of the humor, I implore you to give this series a second chance and pick up issue #15. Seriously, I rarely use "implore," so that should help emphasize just how much I mean it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #17

Sep 25, 2013

As a longtime Deadpool fan, I just can't praise 'The Good, The Bad & The Ugly' enough. It's quite literally giving me everything I could want from a Deadpool comic. There's a great emotional weight to it, some solid laughs and the action is both hilarious and shockingly badass. My fellow Deadpool fans, it would be terribly unwise to miss out on this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #18

Oct 9, 2013

Don't worry, Deadpool, I have a feeling you won't be seeing any 1-star reviews for this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #19

Nov 13, 2013

Seriously, Deadpool fans, this is the story you've been waiting for. Don't miss out on it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #20

Dec 4, 2013

The Good, The Bad and the Ugly was easily one of Deadpool's most gripping stories. This one? It's without question one of the weirdest, and if you're into totally random humor, odds are you'll have a blast.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #21

Dec 18, 2013

Deadpool vs. S.H.I.E.L.D. is taking everything that worked so well in the previous storylines and putting them into one new plot. It's serious and has emotion behind it, yet isn't nearly as somber as The Good, The Bad & The Ugly. It's hilarious and violent, yet it's not totally over-the-top with these elements like in Dead Presidents. While many first chapters for new stories spend much of the time hitting us with exposition and wait until the second part to get things really rolling, this first issue is able to establish the basics without bogging everything down and never fails to entertain. It's hilarious, fun, great to look at and best of all, it's attention-grabbing. Deadpool vs. S.H.I.E.L.D. is off to a great start. Sure, the word "great" has been used seven times in this review, but that's because this issue's... well, great.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #22

Jan 8, 2014

As a long time Deadpool fan, I have to admit that this volume continues to impress me more and more with every issue. This arc is bringing the book back to a bigger emphasis on comedy, but it's still developing Wilson and giving us lots of ridiculously fun action. There's plenty of solid gags, the artwork always does a fine job engaging us, Deadpool's given respect as a combatant, and the overall plot is both intriguing and a blast. What's not to love?

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #23

Feb 12, 2014

Deadpool's going down a dark and bloody path, but co-writers Duggan and Posehn are making sure it's one that's filled with a whole lot of levity and fun as well. This chapter pretty much feels tailor-made for horror movie fans -- primarily Alien(s), obviously -- and it's absolutely wild. It's absurdly violent, ridiculously funny, and still manages to keep the overall plot moving forward. Add in Hawthorne and Bellaire's artwork and you've got yet another incredibly enjoyable issue of DEADPOOL.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #24

Feb 26, 2014

DEADPOOL #24 is a terrific character study. Duggan and Posehn have put Wade through some absolutely horrific events and they're showing us these developments weren't just for shock value. What's gone down isn't being forgotten or cast aside like other stories sometimes tend to do -- they're taking a toll and have consequences. However, seeing as this is DEADPOOL, they're able to balance this focus on character depth with some massively creative bits of action and a consistent supply of sharp jokes. It's an absorbing ride and how it all ends is guaranteed to make you stick around for the next issue. I'm loving this volume and it's very possible Duggan and Posehn were put on this planet just to write Deadpool. The fact they've had the opportunity to share the story with such amazing artists is just... um... sour cream on the chimichanga? Okay, I'll leave the jokes to them from now on. I promise.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #25.NOW

Mar 12, 2014

Deadpool fans, this is yet another must-read story arc by Duggan and Posehn. Opinions may have been mixed when they first kicked off the volume, but since then, they've absolutely proved they're the perfect fit for the Merc with a Mouth. Funny, badass, and a character-driven story... what's not to love?

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #26

Mar 26, 2014

Hey, do you like laughing or even smiling? Yeah? Cool, then you're probably going to really, really like this issue. Sure, comedy is subjective and all that, but I'm having a seriously tough time imagining anyone who wouldn't have a blast with this issue. Duggan and Posehn deliver comedy gold and Koblish and Staples do a tremendous job selling each and every joke. Who would have thought a story about Hitler could be filled with so much joy?

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #28

May 14, 2014

You know that feeling you get when you look deep into the eyes of someone you love? It's a feeling of happiness that you never want to end, right? Well, that's basically how I felt reading this issue. I absolutely loved every second of this ridiculously hysterical ride. It kept me smiling, delivered a staggering amount of amusement, and it all looked great, too. As if an issue that's pure fun wasn't good enough, it also leaves you wondering what's going on and what that will mean for the next story arc. I've said it before and I'll say it again: Duggan and Posehn are doing great things with Deadpool. Don't miss it, my fellow Wade fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #29

May 28, 2014

DEADPOOL #29 hits us with some solid laughs and a fun course of events. In the end, it feels like it's mostly laying down building blocks for the upcoming issues, but it makes sure this is all done in a totally entertaining fashion. It's a shame the visuals feel inconsistent and there aren't any big teasers about Deadpool's origin, but despite that, Duggan and Posehn absolutely have me interested in this series' future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #30

Jun 11, 2014

Duggan and Posehn's volume of DEADPOOL continues to be a ridiculously enjoyable ride. The pencils sometimes takes away from the overall quality, but the team-up is still a blast and there's plenty of laughs to experience. It's a little bit of a bummer the more compelling parts of the story haven't made any significant progress, but it looks like that's all about to change and we're apparently going to get a ginormous reveal in the next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #31

Jul 9, 2014

DEADPOOL's latest storyline finally starts heading in a more gripping direction, but co-writers Duggan and Posehn make sure we're treated to plenty of silly fun before we enter a darker atmosphere. And even when this story does begin to shift gears, it's still able to bring the occasional smile and make sure it isn't a totally depressing experience. And, just like with the last issue, they've left us on one heck of a cliffhanger. Sure, some of expressions and character work can be distracting but, all in all, it's an exciting issue and ends with a whole lot of promise.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #33

Aug 13, 2014

The merc with a mouth's mission to protect his daughter reaches a bloody, funny, and slightly heartfelt conclusion. You have to respect the fact that, since the very first story arc, Duggan and Posehn have been telling stories that take a toll and stick with Wade. He's not simply moving from one mission to the next -- there's connections between each and every one of them and, as remarked in this issue, they're bringing some change to the character. This story may not be as strong as some of the previous arcs and the pencils will be too distracting for some, but it has a satisfying conclusion and I'm stoked for the next "lost" issue -- those are always a total blast!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #34

Sep 10, 2014

DEADPOOL #34 is a very satisfying read for fans of the volume. On top of the steady flow of comedy and having a total blast mocking the '90s, Duggan and Posehn also push their plot with Butler front and center and end it all on a strong emotional note. Plus, Koblish and Staples prove yet again why they continue to receive my praise and respect. Everything the two writers throw their way, they're able to put it on the page with an impressive amount of talent and always deliver the appropriate tone. However, new readers will likely feel pretty lost and will be left wondering why certain characters pop up and how they're connected. It's a bummer for them, but loyal fans are more than likely going to appreciate how this volume's expanding history is included in this entertaining chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #35

Sep 24, 2014

DEADPOOL #35 is a nice reminder why I love this run. There's comedy that'll make me burst into laughter, displays of depth with Deadpool, and they've been doing so much worldbuilding. While other books may jump from one story to the next without any significant connections, every single story in this book -- since Deadpool battled zombie presidents -- has elements carrying over and playing a big role in Deadpool's life. Simply put: Duggan, Posehn, and Hawthorne's DEADPOOL is awesome. This is must read stuff if you like the Merc with a Mouth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #37

Nov 19, 2014

The inversion spell has produced a really, really fun approach to the series and, thanks to two talented writers and a strong visual team, there's plenty of great laughs to enjoy. The new story isn't all that compelling just yet, but it does make up for a basic story by having some really sharp dialogue, animated visuals, and a lot of pure fun. It seems like the next issue's going to be a blast, but I'm really hoping the story will be able to start adding a little more emotion into the mix.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #38

Dec 3, 2014

DEADPOOL #38 isn't all that compelling, but several things make up for that. The artwork is consistently excellent and, when it comes to the script, there's a nice mesh of well-written comedy and plot developments which will more than likely earn your curiosity. The dynamic with Shiklah still isn't getting that much of the spotlight, but it's building up and definitely seems like that relationship is going to explode really soon. I also hope we'll get more substantial material with the FauX-Men in the future, but for now, DEADPOOL continues to prove it's a really, really fun series and definitely worth your time if you like the merc with a mouth. Yeah, Zenpool's the complete opposite of the Deadpool we know and love, but with these two writing, it's still full of great humor and exciting stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool (2012) #39

Dec 24, 2014

Yes, this book will make you laugh multiple times, but it'll also give you an emotional connection. This series really is so much more than just dumb fun, people.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #41

Jan 28, 2015

The end of DEADPOOL is nigh! While this may not feel like the beginning of the end, it's still a comic that had me totally absorbed. Espin and Staples are a great visual team for the comedy and the script has plenty of it. But this issue isn't just laughs! This one has a strong, character-driven opening and continues to show hints of Wade's depth throughout the lighthearted journey. What's especially interesting is this comedic adventure is dipping into far more political material and I'm sure that's something they'll explore in the upcoming issues. DEADPOOL #40 is proof these writers can deliver a serious message and make us laugh at the same time. Sure, things get silly pretty quickly, but Duggan and Posehn still have a great handle on the character and I can't wait to see what'll happen next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #42

Feb 25, 2015

Man, there's only 3 issues left? That's such a bummer, especially because it doesn't really feel like this series is heading towards its end. It still makes me laugh and it still offers ridiculously fun action sequences, but the sense of "everything ends soon" just isn't there yet. I mean, there's a solid and funny teaser in the end, but this isn't feeling like a "big" story yet. Don't get me wrong, I'm still really enjoying it and I have nothing but faith in this creative team -- they've certainly earned it. Hopefully things begin to escalate in the next chapter, but for now, this was a thoroughly entertaining dose of action and fun with just a wee bit of character on the side. Seriously, I think the creative team is telling a story that even Deadpool would enjoy reading.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #43

Mar 11, 2015

The latest story may have started as mostly sill fun, but now the creative team is giving the narrative some much needed weight. They still bring the laughs and there's a whole lot of entertaining and twisted action, but now they're finding a way to get you emotionally invested, too. The bad news: DEADPOOL is racing towards its end. The good news: It's looking like it'll say "goodbye" with a story that's able to deliver everything you'd want from it. A good Deadpool story needs to make you laugh and deliver an emotional gut-punch. Thankfully, that's exactly what this one is doing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) #44

Mar 25, 2015

DEADPOOL #44 is all about two things: buildup and character. Sure, it has some amusing violence and plenty of jokes, but what it really boils down to is it's a comic that'll hook you with a surprisingly down to earth moment between two characters and then it'll leave you thinking about what's to come. And thanks to the art team's steady dose of lovable visuals, we're never pulled out of the moment. The combination of consistently solid visuals and a strong script makes this yet another great chapter in Duggan and Posehn's run. It's too bad we only have one issue left, but at least they've created a run that'll be worth missing. In a time when Deadpool could just be a blatant cash cow, they've given the merc with a mouth a number of great stories -- stories that are definitely worth reading all over again later on. Now, we just have to wait and see whether the big finale delivers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) Annual #1

Nov 27, 2013

You know how The Good, The Bad And the Ugly was emotional, serious, compelling and dark? Imagine the polar opposite of that and that's exactly what DEADPOOL ANNUAL #1 has in store for you. It's just pure levity and is sure to keep you laughing with all of the wackiness it'll throw your way. The timing of the issue's release is definitely an odd choice, but it's a nice little dose of craziness before we jump back into what's going on with Wade in the standard timeline.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2012) Annual #2

May 21, 2014

Yes, this is technically a standalone story that doesn't really bring anything new front and center, but who cares about that when you're having such a good time? Hastings' story is consistently enjoyable and the visuals by Camagni and Milla are such a perfect fit for the story's energetic and lighthearted vibe. When you see an encounter between Deadpool and Spider-Man, it's fair to expect a ridiculous amount of fun since there's been a few good issues featuring the two (e.g. THE AMAZING SPIDER-MAN #611, CABLE & DEADPOOL #24). This one may sell Spidey a little short, but that barely takes away from just how entertaining this annual issue is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool Bi-Annual #1

Sep 17, 2014

DEADPOOL BI-ANNUAL #1 is really, really fun and looks great, but it's a bummer it has zero impact whatsoever on the main narrative (unless Brute Force becomes a big part of the main ongoing, then I'll happily eat my words). If you can afford to spend $4.99 on some very entertaining laughs and all kinds of wacky violence, then have at thee and prepare to feel good. But for everyone else, it looks like you won't miss out on any noteworthy developments if you have to skip this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Deadpool vs. Carnage #2

Apr 16, 2014

DEADPOOL VS. CARNAGE knows exactly what kind of limited series it is. Many of us want to simply see these two crazy characters go at it and Cullen Bunn is clearly having a lot of fun running with the idea. The plot itself may not be that strong and the laughs aren't nearly as solid as his previous work with Deadpool (NIGHT OF THE LIVING DEADPOOL was phenomenal), but if you want to see these two duke it out and get an ample dose of wackiness on the side, then this is something you're most likely going to enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool vs. Carnage #3

May 7, 2014

DEADPOOL VS. CARNAGE is living up to what the name implies. Bunn goes all out with the action and it's a consistently good looking book. The finer details of the story may not be for everyone, but what it generates is most certainly a good time for any fan of these two characters. Bunn's managed to keep the encounters mostly balanced, but it's good to see this issue recognize that yes, there is a physical gap between these two and if Deadpool wants to stand a chance, he needs to bring some extra gear to the table. All in all, this is a fun issue that successfully shifts the book in a new direction. Bring on the next chapter!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool vs. Carnage #4

Jun 25, 2014

When you have a limited series called "DEADPOOL VS. CARNAGE" it needs to have two things: violence and a whole lot of craziness. Cullen Bunn and Salva Espin absolutely deliver on both of these. Yes, I have personal gripes with the plot point that's established in this book and feel down the middle on the conclusion with Carnage, but overall, it's a wacky, bloody and entertaining ride. Honestly, what more could you ask for from a story like this?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool vs. X-Force #1

Jul 2, 2014

DEADPOOL VS. X-FORCE #1 is a great serving of escapism. Sometimes you just want to immerse yourself in something lighthearted and fun, and, if you're a fan of these characters, this will definitely be a good time. Swierczynski has a good handle on Wade Wilson, making the character amusing but also never letting us forget he's a dangerous and not-so-kind person. The members of X-Force feel like they're getting a little downplayed right now, but something tells me that'll quickly change as the story moves forward. Throw in some consistently pleasing visuals and the end result is a thoroughly enjoyable comic. My fellow Deadpool fans, you'll definitely want to give this one a shot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool vs. X-Force #3

Aug 20, 2014

Are you a Deadpool fan and you want to enjoy some comedic, action-packed, and good looking fun? Then you should really consider this limited series. Yes, the overall narrative may not feel very inspired, but they're having a wild time playing around with how these characters -- well, most notably Cable and Deadpool -- would act in this situation. With so many stern and serious stories out there, sometimes it's just okay to jump into something that focuses solely on entertaining you with a ton of action and a heck of a lot of enjoyable banter. Thanks for the laughs, DEADPOOL VS. X-FORCE #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool vs. X-Force #4

Sep 3, 2014

What you see is what you get with DEADPOOL VS. X-FORCE. It's all kinds of crazy, silly, and loaded with a ton of energy. It looks great and it's plenty of good fun, too. There's no real substance here and, as hilariously addressed in the final page, it isn't really something that necessarily needs to be read. However, if you simply want to laugh and enjoy an overdose of madness, you'll absolutely get your money's worth. After reading this limited series, one thing is clear: Marvel needs to let Duane Swierczynski write a new volume of CABLE & DEADPOOL. This arc makes it crystal clear he can handle the banter and action, but given more issues, I'm sure we'd see more character and depth shine through as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool's Art of War #1

Oct 15, 2014

Yes, Marvel has given Deadpool yet another limited series, and yes, this one has a ridiculous narrative, but who cares when it's so well-written looks great? Even though David places Deadpool in absurd situations, his take on the character feels more grounded. Sure, he still talks a whole lot, but he's not rambling, going off on tangents, or spewing pop culture references. Basically, his approach to the character seems perfect for someone who's only a casual fan or doesn't like Deadpool when he's a bit more obnoxious. Throw in Koblish and Staples' consistently delightful visuals -- an art team which constantly delivers over in Duggan/Posehn's book -- and the end result is an enormously entertaining debut issue. If this level of quality keeps up for the rest of the limited series, we should begin to call it DEADPOOL'S ART OF AWESOME.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool's Art of War #2

Nov 5, 2014

Now, I'm sure there are some people currently thinking "I love Peter David, but I don't like Deadpool. What do I do?" With total confidence, I say give this a shot. This isn't reference spewing and obnoxious Deadpool. Instead, it's the plot that's wacky and watching all of these characters become a part of it really is an enjoyable time. Throw in Koblish and Staples' consistently terrific visuals and this is something worthy of your focus. Some may be hesitant because they think the lead is relentlessly abrasive and annoying, but this is a lighthearted and fun story that almost anyone should be able to enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deadpool: The Gauntlet #3

Jan 21, 2014

The best way to describe this third chapter is "pure fun." Duggan and Posehn turn up the randomness and there's plenty of panels and lines that are sure to make you crack up. From the character descriptions in the bios to a hilariously ridiculous chase scene, there's just so much to love. To top it off, the ending is sure to build your hype, too. DEADPOOL: THE GAUNTLET #3, you're an absurdly funny issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Death Of Wolverine #2

Sep 10, 2014

DEATH OF WOLVERINE is certainly doing everything it can to earn your $4.99. The art team is top-notch and Soule clearly understands and respects the popular character. Logan may be walking a path that'll probably lead to his death, but these two chapters give me confidence that Soule will make the character go out on a strong note. The overall narrative won't blow you away just yet, but the intrigue is there, we have a good insight into Logan, the action is thrilling and does the character justice, and the cliffhanger will likely have many fans thoroughly anxious to get their hands on the next chapter. If Wolverine's going to die, I'm very glad this is the team that's handling his end. Maybe if we're lucky they'll handle his eventual return, too.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Death Of Wolverine #3

Oct 1, 2014

I'll admit I was very skeptical when DEATH OF WOLVERINE was first announced. Wolverine's previous run left a lot to be desired and this just felt like a gimmicky move ("come see this popular character die!"). Thankfully, Charles Soule and Steve McNiven are making me eat my words and DEATH OF WOLVERINE is a fantastic journey. It's exciting, emotional, and absolutely gorgeous. You don't even need to be a Wolverine fan because this is a great story that'll hook anyone. If Wolverine is going to meet his maker, this is the right creative team to show us how it'll happen.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Death Of Wolverine: Deadpool & Captain America #1

Oct 29, 2014

DEATH OF WOLVERINE: DEADPOOL AND CAPTAIN AMERICA #1 is a great issue. It's consistently funny and does an effective job making these two open up and talk about Wolverine. It may not make you laugh out loud with every single joke and it may not make you need to grab a tissue for the emotional beats, but it's definitely worth the cover price ($4.99!) and it doesn't feel like they're blatantly cashing in on Wolverine's demise. If you've read The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly and DEATH OF WOLVERINE, that'll make this one-shot adventure even more satisfying.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Death Vigil #1

Jul 9, 2014

Stjepan eji's DEATH VIGIL has won me over for two very simple reasons: the artwork is stunning and the characters are legitimately entertaining. The story may not blow you away just yet, but the basics of this world are presented well enough and this feels like just a taste of what's to come. On top of that, the script manages to always keep these pages fun and exciting. Just enough happens to capture our interest in this new world and now I'm left wanting to see more. DEATH VIGIL's charismatic cast and amazing artwork makes it something anyone can enjoy. You really don't need to be a fantasy fan to appreciate this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Death Vigil #2

Aug 13, 2014

DEATH VIGIL, you've captured my attention. The characters are incredibly charming, the dialogue is full of fun and laughter, and the overall premise continues to slowly unfold and reveal what makes it special. It would be nice to get a little more of the villains' side of things, but with so many characters on the Death Vigil, it's understandable that eji needs to spend so much time with them while also attempting to teach us more and more about this world. I've never been all that big of a fantasy fan, but DEATH VIGIL is impressively entertaining.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deathlok (2014) #2

Nov 26, 2014

Totally honest, I was pretty torn between giving this chapter 3 or 4-stars. Not much was done to really expand my interest in the bigger picture and the action scene wasn't all that stunning, especially when compared to what happened in the first issue. That said, the artwork is consistently good and creative, so even if the narrative isn't taking big steps, the impressive visuals make sure my eyes are glued to these pages and it has my complete attention. Also, I like how Henry, not Deathlok, is receiving a little more insight. It isn't anything major just yet, but Edomndson is making me care more and more about this new Deathlok and that makes me want to see where this path will take him. There's a lot of potential here and, so far, I'm having a pretty good time with it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deathstroke (2011) #15

Dec 12, 2012

It's good to have you back, Deathstroke. So far Jordan seems to have a firm grasp on the character (and I'd hope so since he's also writing TEAM 7) and I'm really pumped to see what he has in store for DC's deadliest mercenary. I'm loving the hit on Koschei and I'm especially curious to see what conclusion Slade's reached. This title's violent and smart and that's exactly how a Deathstroke title should be.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deathstroke (2011) #16

Jan 16, 2013

Writer Justin Jordan takes over the title with an incredibly fun yet short story. Deathstroke appears to be back in full force and I'm optimistic about what Jordan has in store for DC's deadliest mercenary. This issue is action packed and only takes a minor break a few pages in. If you're a Deathstroke fan, odds are you'll love it.Oh yeah, the teaser for the next issue is "How to fight 10,000 ninjas." Um, yes, please!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deathstroke (2011) #17

Feb 13, 2013

This is one of those rare instances where the cover offers an accurate representation of what happens in the book. While there of course isn't actually 10,000 enemies, the issue pretty much boils down to Deathstroke vs. an overwhelming amount of ninjas. It's fun, violent and yet another reminder that Slade's called the best mercenary around for a reason. Just don't come into this issue expecting any strong character development or a deep plot and odds are you'll have a good time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deathstroke (2011) #20

May 8, 2013

While the final remark is meant to express how badass Slade is (you know, just in case you haven't heard by now), it also feels like a jab at the character's future. Let's say some writer has the opportunity down the road to give Slade his own ongoing again. Well, God help him when it comes to keeping that series alive! It's definitely a shame to see Slade leave just when things were turning around, but hey, at least it ends on a high note, right? Here's hoping we see more of the Terminator in other titles.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Deathstroke (2014) #4

Jan 28, 2015

DEATHSTROKE #4 takes some time to slow things down and focuses on story. It isn't the most absorbing issue, but it gets plenty of mandatory information out there and does a solid job building up the hype for what's to come. It should come as no surprise by now that it's an issue filled with visuals that match the tone perfectly and there's even a good laugh thrown into the mix. Now it's a matter of seeing if all of this buildup will be worth the wait! Considering what the next chapter will contain, I'm seriously looking forward to DEATHSTROKE #5. Here's hoping it's better than Deathstroke vs. Bronze Tiger!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deep State #1

Nov 12, 2014

Does a more serious sci-fi book with a horror vibe that draws parallels to X-Files and Men in Black sound good to you? If so, you'll want to pick up BOOM! Studios' DEEP STATE #1. Jordan yanks us right into this shadowy world and unleashes a very entertaining first mystery. With just this debut chapter, he's able to tell us the basics about what makes this place unique, gives us a little insight into the two leads, and delivers an exciting conclusion. Kristantina and Wilsonham's visuals are a great fit for this darker and more mysterious atmosphere and each page does a more than satisfying job pulling you into each setting. DEEP STATE is off to a very promising start and, if you love sci-fi mysteries, you should really consider checking it out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deep State #2

Dec 10, 2014

DEEP STATE #2 should be an obvious purchase for sci-fi fans, especially ones that loved The X-Files and Men in Black. Yes, the concept is all kinds of familiar, but Jordan's talented writing makes up for that and then some and turns this into something that's full of promise. The characters are well-written, the mystery is absorbing, and there's a moment or two where the visuals really sell the compelling scenes and pull you right into 'em. DEEP STATE is off to a great start and has a whole lot of potential.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deep State #3

Jan 14, 2015

Justin Jordan has this ability to take a gazillion familiar elements and turn them into a story that feels unique, exciting, and totally fun (e.g. SPREAD, DEAD BODY ROAD, LUTHER STRODE). You can go on and on about what DEEP STATE reminds you of, but it's being handled in a way that prevents you from thinking about that while you're reading it. He's able to create interesting characters and stories and DEEP STATE is no exception, so now it's just a matter of seeing when he'll offer a really good amount of insight into this plot and the two leads. In the meantime, it's clear he has no problem making sure the series is full of thrills and even the occasional laugh. Throw in visuals that really sell the horror and sci-fi elements and you've got yet another non-superhero book that's absolutely worth reading.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deep State #4

Feb 11, 2015

It's easy to see why DEEP STATE is probably going to become a TV series. It may be a familiar concept, but what matters is the execution and, so far, this is turning out to be a really good time. The alien itself may receive a pretty standard conclusion and it's not bringing anything profound to the table (at least not yet), but the mystery surrounding both characters and the world around them continues to have me hooked. If you've been following since the first issue or if you find yourself on the fence about whether you'll stick around for issue five, this ending is absolutely going to make you purchase the next one. Get on this, sci-fi junkies.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2011) #23

Aug 7, 2013

With terrifically detailed illustrations, solid coloring and a fine plot trucking along at a steady pace, DETECTIVE COMICS continues to prove it's one of the Batman titles you should definitely have on your radar. I'll admit, my love for the pre-52 version of the villain definitely enhances the reading experience for me, but it's still being executed quite well and is turning out to be a solid story. After two big developments, I can't wait to see what the next issue has in store for us. Fingers are crossed we get more of an insight into Wrath and, of course, a longer fight with Batman.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Detective Comics (2011) #23.2

Sep 11, 2013

This issue is every bit as twisted as Harley Quinn's New 52 mentality. It's commendable Kindt went against the expected (aka an issue full of laughs and wackiness), but unfortunately, he went too far in the opposite direction and has -- to me, at least -- transformed Harley Quinn into an irredeemable and unlikable character. The tone took a majorly drastic shift and left me feeling like the chaos was simply trying to go too far over the top. It will, however, be interesting to see how Quinn is handled in the future since Kindt will be writing her in SUICIDE SQUAD and she'll apparently have a more comedic vibe in her upcoming solo.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2011) #23.3

Sep 18, 2013

Most Villains Month issues shine the spotlight on the character and dive into their origin story or expand upon what makes them unique. This issue isn't one of those at all. Sure, Tomasi gives us a taste of Scarecrow's personality throughout the read, but this is ultimately an issue that exists just to build the hype for 'Arkham War.' It's not particularly exciting and at times feels bogged down by an overabundance of dialogue, but it gets the job done when it comes to teasing the upcoming conflict between Batman's villains.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2011) #24

Oct 2, 2013

While it would have been nice to have a bigger final confrontation between these two and some of the dialogue comes off as forced, this was still a thoroughly satisfying conclusion to Wrath's New 52 debut. There's a nice amount of emotion to help break up the chaotic events and the visuals absolutely deliver and then some. This story has definitely put DETECTIVE COMICS back on my radar and I'm looking forward to what's next.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2011) Annual #2

Jul 31, 2013

The first back up story is satisfying and there are some gems to be found in the overall narrative, but for the most part, it's pretty generic despite trying to throw us off with a twist. And again, a big hindrance is saving details you need in the first story until the final back up -- it really takes away from what could have been a powerful moment. That said, the art remains solid throughout and it seems fair to assume this is a character who will appear by Wrath's side.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Dexter #1

Jul 3, 2013

For me, the biggest benefit of throwing Dexter Morgan into the panels is the fun they can have with the visuals and that's more than transparent with the creative and pleasing use of his dark passenger. As I said above, the book doesn't really do anything to blow you away or surprise you, but it's by no means bad, either. It's a pretty simple and formulaic intro and if you're a fan of the character, it's worth at least checking out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dexter's Laboratory #1

Apr 30, 2014

DEXTER'S LABORATORY #1 is pure happiness. It's consistently full of fun and establishes an energetic and attention-grabbing story. And with an ending like this one, there's absolutely no way you'll be able to resist picking up the next chapter. It's a potentially twisted cliffhanger, but we'll just have to wait and see how it's handled. No matter what direction the book goes next, it's safe to say these characters are in good hands. Fill yourself with a bit of joy and give this pleasant issue a read; you've earned it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Drifter #1

Nov 12, 2014

DRIFTER immediately makes me think of several other franchises. For me, Dune, Borderlands and even Star Wars' Mos Eisley immediately come to mind as we're taken to a world where the air looks every bit as thick as it's described in the script and the world is pretty much down in the dumps. This may be a futuristic sci-fi universe, but this planet has apparently been left behind. DRIFTER isn't focusing on telling us about its unique universe or wowing you with the possible technology it possess. Instead, it's purely character-driven and does a good job teasing several things. The end of this first issue is going to leave you with a number of questions, but it's also going to make you want to stick around to see if they'll each be answered. Thanks to some seriously impressive artwork and strong writing, DRIFTER's off to a solid start.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Elektra (2014) #4

Jul 16, 2014

Do yourself a favor and make room for ELEKTRA on your pull list. Del Mundo's pages are awe-inspiring and do a magnificent job turning Blackman's commendable script into a fascinating and exhilarating journey. This issue is paced so well, too. We're treated to just the right amount of character-driven scenes and then we're thrown into some gorgeous and fast-paced chaos. And if you've been following along (if not, go play catch-up right now!), you're sure to be excited about the final page.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Elektra (2014) #5

Aug 20, 2014

Make room on your pull list for ELEKTRA because this is a book you really shouldn't miss. The action is fast-paced and jaw-dropping, the pages are loaded with absolutely beautiful and clever artwork, and the script never loosens its grip on your interest and successfully gives Elektra the amount of insight and depth she deserves. This latest chapter gives you all of the above and does an excellent job teasing what the next story arc will likely address. Seriously, be good to yourself and give ELEKTRA a shot. Honestly, you can have no interest in the character whatsoever and the solid writing and phenomenal visuals will turn you into a fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Elektra (2014) #6

Sep 17, 2014

The change in artwork is sure to be off-putting for some and yes, it is a bummer because Del Mundo's art is phenomenal. However, Blackman's still telling a story that has captured my attention and the beginning of this new arc is just gripping enough to have you interested in seeing what'll happen after the wonderful cliffhanger. While the new visuals may not blow your mind, they're still serviceable and offer a few standout moments. All in all, ELEKTRA #6 is a solid start for the new storyline. It gets the basics out of the way for new readers and wastes no time before throwing us into plenty of ninja action. It may not have the same level of substance as the previous chapters and the artwork may not be as stunning, but the arc is off to an exciting start.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Elektra (2014) #7

Oct 29, 2014

ELEKTRA may not longer have mind-blowing visuals, but that doesn't prevent it from still being all kinds of exciting. Blackman's script is fast-paced and does a great job balancing thrills and personality. Under Blackman's writing, Elektra's a total boss and a character I just can't get enough of. This chapter's full of energetic action and moments that'll make you recognize just how deadly and impressive Elektra can be. When the dust has finally settled, there's a brief and somewhat emotional moment as the hype is built for the next story. The stage has been set and I'm very anxious to see what'll happen next. Love action and good writing? Do yourself a favor and read ELEKTRA.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Elektra (2014) #8

Nov 19, 2014

The latest ELEKTRA story, Reverence, is off to a fantastic and exhilarating start. Blackman and Del Mundo are going above and beyond with the creativity and it's amazing how well they can blend story, action and character in such a ridiculously fast-paced chapter. The issue never really gives you a chance to catch your breath, offering only a momentary pause before things get crazy and thrilling once again. Its story is consistently exciting and the artwork is never anything short of jaw-dropping. It doesn't matter how interested you are in Elektra because this is a comic that's pretty much guaranteed to win you over and make you want to see more of her world.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Elektra (2014) #9

Dec 17, 2014

Everything about this series continues to go above and beyond what I could hope for and, no matter how much I praise it, those words just won't live up to how good this comic actually is. It's a book that'll completely absorb your mind and your eyes. Please, do yourself a favor and bring ELEKTRA into your life. It'll give you a stunning escape from reality.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Elektra (2014) #10

Jan 21, 2015

Since this is the penultimate issue and there's a fair amount of ground to cover (e.g. going inside Bullseye's mind, finding out who's behind the Assassins Guild and seeking them out), this chapter feels like it moves things along a little too quickly. Despite that, this is still another chapter of ELEKTRA that had me completely absorbed and wanting to spend so much more time in her world. Blackman continues to fill this comic with imagination and Del Mundo (along with D'Alfonso) continues to create jaw-dropping visuals. The creative team has made this series such a phenomenal adventure, so it's incredibly disappointing this series will end with the next issue. At least the cliffhanger implies it's going to leave on quite an exciting note!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Elektra (2014) #11

Mar 25, 2015

ELEKTRA leaves us with an issue that's full of gorgeous and imaginative visuals, thrilling action, and an ending that makes you wish it wasn't saying "goodbye." It's simply bringing it on every single level. It may not be as inventive as some of the previous chapters, but it's still able to wrap things up in an engaging and entertaining way while also giving us a conclusion that's thoroughly satisfying -- I just wish we could see what happens next! Just remember, it's better to have loved and lost than never to have loved at all. And ELEKTRA? This series sure gave us a lot to love.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Eternal Warrior (2013) #1

Sep 11, 2013

The VerdirctDespite being 23 pages long, this issue felt like a super quick read and that just goes to show how thoroughly entertaining and gripping it is. When I was hit with the last page, I immediately wanted more. ETERNAL WARRIOR #1 is action-packed, well-written, and overflowing with potential. Yeah, you can bet I'm sticking around for the next issue and I strongly recommend you give this a shot, too. Consider this another victory for Valiant.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Eternal Warrior (2013) #2

Oct 9, 2013

In the event you missed out on issue #1, an informative intro makes this a totally adequate jumping on point. However, I still strongly recommend buying the first issue just so you can see how everything actually plays out for yourself. Plus, it's awesome, and you like awesome stuff, right?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Eternal Warrior (2013) #3

Nov 20, 2013

While it's not as action-packed or as exciting as the other issues, Pak dedicates the vast majority of this one to answering numerous questions we've had and even creating a few new ones. The writer's creativity is on overdrive as he continues to grow the fantasy world around Gilad while never really neglecting character development, either. I'm definitely looking forward to seeing where this all goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Eternal Warrior (2013) #5

Jan 22, 2014

ETERNAL WARRIOR #5 is a perfect jumping on point and continues to show Pak's creativity. All of the fantasy elements are tossed out the window (immortality aside, of course) and Pak uses the issue to focus on a simple concept: a man striving to protect the people he cares about. We've only seen the basics of this version of the future and it's definitely an attention grabber. Additionally, Gill's art demonstrates he's a more than able fit for the book. Do yourself a favor and buy this.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Eternal Warrior (2013) #6

Feb 12, 2014

Remember PLANET HULK, that little story Greg Pak wrote over at Marvel? Well, this new arc in ETERNAL WARRIOR sure is reminding me of it. Pak's taking a hero we know and love and dropping them right into a whole new environment. Issue after issue, the writer is fleshing out this unfamiliar world, making it both unique and interesting. To top it off, he's also doing a remarkable job building our emotional connection to Gilad and Caroline. What's the point of all this action and death if you just don't care about the characters involved, right? This is a book that doesn't suffer from that issue in the least. I wouldn't be surprised if this storyline has the potential to get the waterworks going as we move forward...

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Five Weapons #1

Feb 27, 2013

Jimmie Robinson has done a wonderful job crafting an energetic and entertaining world for us to venture into. There's plenty of fun to be had as we learn the basics and there's more than enough intrigue filling these pages to have me thrilled for the next issue. Go ahead, give this issue an honest shot and it just may be the reading highlight of your week.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Five Weapons #2

Mar 27, 2013

Tyler vs. Rick is goind down in the next issue and, if you've been reading along, that should be more than enough incentive to check #3 out when it hits the stands. Simply put: FIVE WEAPONS is just a wonderful book that puts me in a great mood. It's a pleasant universe that I'm happy to dive into every month and I highly recommend it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Five Weapons #3

Apr 24, 2013

I don't know about you, but this cliffhanger has me absolutely baffled. Sure, the conclusion felt rather abrupt, but at the same rate, it just makes me even more curious to see how it'll all unfold with Darryl. No matter how it turns out, Robinson has more than proved I should have confidence in how he'll wrap up this competition.Unfortunately, time isn't exactly on Robinson's side with this one. I'm slightly concerned he's bit off more than he can chew because there's only two issues left and there's still a lot of really cool things to explore (Principal O's need for revenge, the nurse, Tyler's back story, etc). I'm optimistic for the most part, but at the same rate, there is some worry that intriguing aspects can potentially be squished into a much shorter segment. Regardless, I continue to love this series and I'm thrilled to see this chapter continues to deliver the goods.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Five Weapons #4

May 29, 2013

On one hand, I'm stoked this book continues to feel like a breath of fresh air that someone of any age can enjoy. But on the other hand, there's only one issue left! As of right now, it does seem as though Robinson can juggle all of the key plot points in the final issue, but I'd be a liar if I said I'm not slightly concerned with the limited panel space left for this universe. Regardless, Robinson has absolutely earned my faith thus far, so I'm excited to see how this fantastic story concludes next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Five Weapons #5

Jul 3, 2013

FIVE WEAPONS has grown on me a lot over the months. This title took me by surprise and I simply couldn't help but fall in love with thanks to its vibrant visuals, energetic cast and engrossing plot. Naturally, its final chapter comes as a double-edged sword to me -- I'm delighted to get answers yet saddened because it means saying goodbye. Thankfully, it delivers when it comes to answering (most) of our questions and remains every bit as sharp as the previous four issues. And the best part of it all? Robinson leaves the door open for a sequel and I sincerely hope Image gives him the green light to create one!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Five Weapons #6

Jan 29, 2014

FIVE WEAPONS is back and as wonderful as ever. Jimmie Robinson kicks off the second volume by making the stage even bigger than the first volume. There's more characters, there's more mystery, and there's most definitely more conflict. To spice things up, there's a whole new twist with the protagonist, and it's one that's sure to keep us guessing how he'll solve each problem as they appear. I strongly recommend FIVE WEAPONS #6 to anyone looking for a refreshing and fun story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Five Weapons #7

Feb 26, 2014

Seven issues in and this book continues to charm. The characters are legitimately fun and Robinson always manages to keep us searching for clues and leaves us guessing how Enrique will get out of his latest dilemma. To top it all off, the book has wonderful visuals and Robinson has begun to add some ginormous developments to the plot. Despite being a book about assassins, FIVE WEAPONS is full of happiness and wit.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Five Weapons #8

Apr 16, 2014

I just can't recommend FIVE WEAPONS enough. Jimmie Robinson has taken what could be a very graphic, dark and mature concept and handles it in a way that makes it appealing to readers of all ages. It's a book about kids who want to become assassins, yet it has a delightfully pleasant tone, a diverse and unique cast of characters, and a wonderfully fun and animated set of visuals. Throw in a consistently clever script and the result is a title that has continued to impress me since its very first issue. This should be a mandatory purchase for my fellow FIVE WEAPONS fans; however, if you're considering finally diving into this world, this is by no means an ideal jumping on spot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Five Weapons #9

Jun 4, 2014

FIVE WEAPONS continues to deliver exactly what I've come to expect from it: wonderfully animated visuals, a clever script, and an ending that'll have me speculating until I get my hands on the next issue! This chapter spends much of its time connecting the dots for us and then hits us with a huge reveal. Now I'm left extremely curious to see what'll happen next!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Five Weapons #10

Jul 30, 2014

It's a major bummer this series had to conclude sooner than anticipated and it's absolutely something that would have been noticed without a note from the writer at the very end. It feels like Robinson was doing so much worldbuilding with these latest issues, and even though it stinks we won't get to see his full plans for this universe, it still feels like we received a decent glimpse of what he had in store for it. Despite needing to wrap things up early, Robinson still manages to craft another satisfying chapter from the lovable series. Enrique's intellect is once again put on display, there's an absurdly fun set of action scenes, and, as expected, Robinson and Little make sure the visuals are every bit as fun as the lively assortment of characters are. Even though the ending is totally abrupt, I still had a blast reading this. If you're looking for a smart, delightful and exciting all ages story, I strongly recommend checking out FIVE WEAPONS from the very beginning.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Forever Evil Aftermath: Batman vs. Bane #1

Apr 30, 2014

If you saw the cover of the issue and exclaimed, "YES!" then odds are you'll be pretty pleased. Basically, Tomasi gives us exactly what we were expecting: Batman's return and a big brawl with Bane. It's not one of the most elaborate fights around, but it's straightforward, savage, and a damn good time. If you simply want to enjoy a slugfest and see Gotham slowly return to its status quo, it's safe to say you'll be happy with this one. Expect anything more than that and you'll probably finish the read feeling pretty mediocre about it. So, do yourself a favor: shut off your brain and enjoy the punches.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Forever Evil: Arkham War #1

Oct 9, 2013

And yes, you don't really need to read the previous Villains Month issues (Bane/Scarecrow) to get a proper hold of what's going on. This is totally a serviceable jumping on spot for the story and rightfully so.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Forever Evil: Arkham War #2

Nov 13, 2013

Part Two of ARKHAM WAR is entertaining and looks good, but ultimately, it comes off as pure set-up for what's to come without ever really engrossing us in what's currently going down. It's not a bad issue, but it's one of those reads that'll definitely be better in a collection. There's a lot of potential here and Tomasi's doing a bit of a slow burn with the greater picture, so hopefully the narrative makes some game-changing developments in the next one and he's able to give characters other than Bane and Penguin more of the spotlight. And yes, I say that as someone who can never get enough of Bane.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Forever Evil: Arkham War #6

Mar 5, 2014

The VedictDo you like seeing Bane punch things really, really hard? If so, you'll have an okay time with this chapter. However, if you were expecting a huge payoff with the war's ending, you're likely to be letdown because this literally boils down to a big (albeit good looking) match of rock 'em sock 'em robots. It's remarked that Bane's a great tactician, but let's be honest, this book exists just to see some fighting between Batman's villains and the plot itself feels secondary. If that's all you expect or want, then it'll be worth the $2.99. For everyone else, you're probably better off spending that money elsewhere.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Gambit (2012) #8

Jan 23, 2013

Look, I'll be the first to admit that I probably enjoyed this more than I should simply because Gambit has always been one of my favorites. There's no denying this issue is filler (unless we return to what's going on in the Forever City, and that feels unlikely at this point since it's being passed off to Beast), but it's definitely a fairly entertaining distraction. The cliffhanger establishes a bigger plot point ahead and that's something that totally has my interest piqued. I'm looking forward to seeing Gambit encounter some familiar enemies (ZE LEAPER!) and where his interactions with Joelle will take us.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Gambit (2012) #12

May 15, 2013

This issue's big on fun, serves up plenty of solid banter and character interactions, and is loaded with just the right amount of heart. Throw in terrific yet diverse visuals and I can confidently say this story arc is without question the best one from the series thus far. Does my love for Gambit boost my enjoyment of this book? Absolutely and I won't deny that for even a second. I imagine if you're not a big fan of the character, this chapter will likely fall more into the 3.5-4 star range for you. I haven't been all that enthusiastic about this book for awhile now, but thanks to the last few issues, my opinion has done a complete 180. Nice to have you back, Remy!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Gambit (2012) #13

May 29, 2013

I'm sure some of you won't mind that this issue is basically a standalone romp. A break from the overly dramatic and epic course of events can be a nice little vacation every now and then, but with the series' end apparently in sight, I'm really hoping this cliffhanger brings back the level of quality we were treated to in the last few issues. At any rate, it's sad to know this series has an approaching expiration date, but hopefully Asmus will have Remy leave us with one helluva bang!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Goners #1

Oct 22, 2014

GONERS #1's fast-paced story means you probably won't establish an emotional connection to the characters or developments just yet, but odds are it'll leave you asking plenty of questions and have you more than interested enough to see what'll unfold. Plus, Corona and Cassata's visuals? Pure happiness. What ensues may have plenty of violence and darkness, but their work makes it all fun and so animated. The story has my curiosity, but the visuals have me hooked.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Goners #3

Dec 16, 2014

GONERS #3 has it all. It's emotional, full of mystery, has more than a few thrills, and it's all presented with some awesomely animated visuals. The artwork continues to win me over and really does feel like the perfect way to bring this fun yet scary tale to life. The story grows in a way that brings about interesting new elements without taking a toll on the pacing. It's character-driven and packed with just the right amount of comedy, excitement, and fright as it teaches us more and more about this new world. It's a terrific blend of supernatural horror and adventure, so if that sounds appealing to you -- and it should -- you need to do yourself a favor and give this series a chance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Goners #5

Feb 18, 2015

GONERS' amazing visuals grabs my attention and then its evergrowing story keeps me around. Every panel has something that's worth looking at for more than a few seconds and there's some ginormous mythos building going on in this story. It may feel like they're hitting you with a little too much, but it's still incredibly interesting and creative stuff. I'm still left asking plenty of questions about certain elements, but that's part of the fun, after all. Part of me wishes this chapter focused a little more on the fun and charming moments before getting into the heavier material, but it's still more than enough keep me thinking about everything that's going on. And man, there's a lot going on. If this fun and twisted take on fantasy adventure stories sounds appealing to you, I strongly recommend beginning with the first issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Grayson #4

Nov 5, 2014

GRAYSON #4 takes a bit of a break from the bigger picture to simply have some fun. It gives Grayson a chance to be happy again and that joyous feeling is definitely shared by the reader. Overall, this is mostly filler, but it's lighthearted and enjoyable filler! Sometimes a little break from the more compelling and meaty material can be a good thing. Well, that's exactly what GRAYSON #4 is. If you want to see a bunch of jokes made about Grayson's looks and watch him flip around, you'll more than likely have a good time.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #19

Apr 3, 2013

Just three issues in and this title has skyrocketed to the top of my pull list. This is without question one of the best ongoings DC comics is currently offering. The story is engaging and the dynamic visuals are stellar. It doesn't matter if you don't like Green Arrow -- this will turn you into a fan. Go read this book. Now!Also, is it just me, or does it look like Emiko Lacroix could be Constantine Drakon Jr? If he won't make it into the New 52, I'm more than happy to see his super-speeding badassery transferred into this little package of death.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #20

May 1, 2013

The new take on GREEN ARROW is consistently fantastic. Writer Jeff Lemire provides solid script and pacing and, as I've already said a gazillion times before, the art team creates some truly incredibly pages. The desert story has been teased long enough and now it looks like we're moving full speed ahead. We've had plenty of fun with Komodo (and I'm sure we'll see him and his daughter reappear... or at least I hope so), but now it's time to dive face first into the bigger mystery. Based on what we've seen so far, I'm sure the team will continue to deliver. This is quickly becoming one of DC's most engrossing books for me.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #21

Jun 5, 2013

Calling it a "conclusion" in solicitations is definitely misleading. If anything, GREEN ARROW #21 feels more like an awesome prelude and serves as a stellar jumping on point. Lemire, Sorrentino and Maiolo have proved month after month they can craft a phenomenal GREEN ARROW tale and this issue is certainly no exception. Sporting a solid script, interesting new plot points and brilliant art, this continues to be one of DC's most entertaining titles and is without question my most anticipated book from the publisher.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #22

Jul 3, 2013

Remember that time Jeff Lemire and Andrea Sorrentino made GREEN ARROW really good? Well, they're still doing that! The two are a match made in heaven for Oliver Queen and this issue proves yet again it's quickly becoming one of the top books The New 52 has to offer. Lemire's writing continues to impress by delivering a fair balance of levity, thrilling action and huge plot developments. And Sorrentino's art? The man continues to outdo himself with jaw-droppingly good work. Seriously, go buy this book.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #23

Aug 7, 2013

Alright, it's official: GREEN ARROW has become my favorite DC title. Month after month, Lemire/Sorrentino/Maiolo blow me away. The story moves at a strong pace and is full of excitement, solid dialogue and massive potential. Meanwhile, Sorrentino and Maiolo create pages that leave me speechless. Overall, it's a great looking book with a great writer. What more could you honestly ask for?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2011) #23.1

Sep 4, 2013

Lemire, Sorrentino and Maiolo are without question the best thing to happen to Oliver in The New 52 and continue to deliver. I can't wait for the next issue. Okay, I can, but seeing as the book is so good, I'd prefer not to.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #24

Oct 2, 2013

You know how I've been constantly praising this title? Well, now it's time for you to see why. GREEN ARROW #24 is clearly constructed as a jumping on point, yet it still comes off feeling like an epic finale while successfully building-up something much bigger. There's plenty of hype to be found as a new character enters the fray and the spotlight is given to a character who was previously teased. Additionally, this issue is a prime example of why I love Sorrentino/Maiolo's artwork. In spite of a fair amount of the content being dark or tragic, I couldn't help but smile at how impressive the visuals were. Buy this issue. Like, right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2011) #25

Nov 6, 2013

Oliver's 'Zero Year' tie-in doesn't shed much light on his past or his return the to United States, but it's still hugely entertaining thanks to Lemire once again providing a tight yet fun script and the brilliant visuals by Sorrentino/Maiolo. Ultimately, this issue serves to do two things: offer an exciting fight with a novice Green Arrow and give us the basics of Diggle's connection to Queen. It accomplishes both of those and it's absolutely worth picking up if you've been following along or looking to jump onboard. #24 is the better jumping on point, but this is totally serviceable for new readers as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2011) #26

Dec 4, 2013

We've been hearing so much about all of the different clans and this opening chapter serves as mostly buildup to the greater picture. There's nothing explosive here, but I dig the character-driven emphasis with Oliver and you can really feel there's something epic coming around the corner. A few big factors are set in motion and, now that the set up is primarily out of the way, it's time for the "war" to truly begin. A return to the island may feel redundant (especially if you're watching Arrow), but with Lemire's creative writing and Sorrentino/Maiolo's impressive artwork, it's a very welcome trip and I'm seriously looking forward to the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #27

Jan 8, 2014

The opening chapter of GREEN ARROW's latest story, The Outsiders War, was really good but primarily establishing all of the basics. This second chapter, though? I'm completely blown away. Jeff Lemire moves the story ahead at full speed and winds up creating a great issue that is easily one of my favorites from the entire series so far. On top of that, Andrea Sorrentino and Marcelo Maiolo's artwork is as creative and impressive as ever -- it's a real visual treat. GREEN ARROW is without question one of the top books from DC and you need to check it out.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #28

Feb 5, 2014

Secrets are explained, new alliances are formed, and the tension builds. Lemire's plot remains both gripping and exciting, but Sorrentino and Maiolo's artwork is simply out of this world. This is without question the best looking book in my pull list and I find myself once again beyond anxious to purchase the next issue. I just can't recommend this series enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #29

Mar 5, 2014

Ladies and gentlemen, GREEN ARROW is awesome. Lemire keeps the pace moving with big developments and Sorrentino/Maiolo's artwork will make sure your eyes are glued to the panels. It's not only a legitimately exciting and absorbing book, but it's easily one of the best looking books DC is putting out there, too. Month after month, GREEN ARROW continues to prove it's worth every single penny of the cover price. Do yourself a favor and give this series a read. Don't worry, you can thank me later.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2011) #31

May 7, 2014

The Outsiders War ends on a consistently gorgeous and pretty satisfying note. Truthfully, the story feels like it's trying to juggle a little too much at times, but it's mostly well-written, makes some big developments and has some legitimately stunning moments. It may not be a perfect bull's eye, but it's still a massively enjoyable ride and does a terrific job building the hype for what's to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #32

Jun 4, 2014

Broken is off to a very strong start. Lemire wastes no time getting things moving and he covers a ton of ground. Multiple -- and not to mention very awesome -- plot points are established here and I'm beyond happy to see the developments in The Outsiders War aren't being left behind. Throw in Sorrentino and Maiolo's consistently incredible visuals and this is an issue every single Green Arrow fan needs to buy. Oh, and I can't forget to mention this is a jumping on point, too!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011) #33

Jul 2, 2014

Thankfully, GREEN ARROW continues to prove why it's one of my favorite titles. The second chapter of Broken is a thrilling experience that juggles a nice blend of drama, action, and levity. On top of that, it leaves us on a note that'll almost certainly make you gasp. You can see the big incident coming a mile away, but the execution of the scene is tremendously effective and it has me totally clueless about what'll happen. Sorrentino and Maiolo continue to impress and then some -- I just can't praise this duo enough. They really are one of the best art teams around right now and we're very lucky that they're working with such a talented writer, too. Now comes the hard part: waiting to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2011) #34

Aug 6, 2014

Can you believe it's already time to say goodbye to GREEN ARROW's stellar creative team?! It feels like not so long ago that Lemire, Sorreinto, and Maiolo took over and put this book in a whole new and legitimately exciting direction. It's a real shame they're now going off to different projects, but at least they're leaving us with a thoroughly satisfying conclusion and a meaningful ending. It's a bit of a bummer the way the conflict with Dragon was resolved and I would have liked to see a wee bit more closure with Fyff and Singh, but this is still a great issue and an especially great way to depart the book. GREEN ARROW went from a book that wasn't on many radars to one of the best books available. They did wonders with Oliver Queen's life and produced some excellent adventures. You'll be missed, Lemire, Sorrentino, and Maiolo! Here's hoping the next team can give this conclusion a proper follow-up!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Arrow (2011) #35

Oct 1, 2014

I'm left feeling very down the middle with the beginning of this new run. It's great that they're already taking big steps to bring in new faces and expand Oliver's world, but the attempts to draw parallels to the CW show feels a tad forced and the cliffhanger lacks any oomph. Maybe if it wasn't heavily promoted that a certain character would join the mix, it would have been a more exciting way to end the issue. Unfortunately, that wasn't the case at all. GREEN ARROW #35 doesn't feel like a brilliant new direction for the character, but there's certainly some potential in there. Here's hoping the new creative team capitalizes on that instead of making this come off as just an okay adventure for the Emerald Archer.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Arrow (2011) #38

Jan 7, 2015

The latest GREEN ARROW arc isn't bad, but it feels very standard and doesn't really leave an impact. That said, I enjoy a majority of the banter, the action is mostly fun, it looks pretty good, and I'm curious to see just how much worldbuilding they'll continue to bring to Oliver's world. I'm enjoying it, but it doesn't leave me anxious to read the next issue and I don't find myself all that captivated by what's going on. It's basically a story arc that continues to leave me feeling down the middle, and for many GREEN ARROW fans, that'll likely be very disappointing considering just how good the previous story arcs were.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Green Arrow (2011): Futures End #1

Sep 3, 2014

GREEN ARROW: FUTURES END #1 is a bittersweet experience. As a fan of the creative team's run with the Emerald Archer, I'm so happy that we received an awesome end that's full of fan service. However, it's the end! Major bummer, right? The issue gives Lemire an opportunity to say "goodbye" to Oliver Queen and his supporting cast. We all would love to see the writer have more time with Ollie and his friends, but he makes good use of his limited time and ends their run on a thoroughly gratifying note. Additionally, Lemire's able to establish a strong link to the bigger picture and it just may be enough to make readers interested in picking up FUTURES END #21 (I sure know I will). And it really should shock no one that the art team makes the entire ride look amazing. Lemire and Sorrentino turned GREEN ARROW into a must read comic and this is a great way to end their time with the hero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Lantern (2011) #17

Feb 20, 2013

You can't help but feel like all of Johns' work in this huge universe has been building to this one story, and thankfully,this is definitely a very solid start. The final page is huge (not to mention is a guaranteed laugh) and we can already tell the ramifications of The First Lantern's release will be even bigger.In case you missed the news,Robert VendittiandBilly Tanwill take over the title when Johns departs.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern Corps (2011) #18

Mar 13, 2013

While this is technically Part 6 of the event, it doesn't really come off as mandatory reading. If you're a big fan of John Stewart or a completionist with Geoff Johns' final GL story, then yes, this one's worth a purchase. But if you're not a die-hard fan of the character or just want to know the basics of what goes down in Wrath of the First Lantern, then I'd say this one falls somewhere in the middle.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #1

Mar 26, 2013

GUARDIANS OF THE GALAXY comes out of the gate with an entertaining chapter that's loads of fun and looks exceptional. However, so far the overall narrative is fairly light and has a bit of a bland opening . Regardless, Bendis has managed to make this new reader friendly (even if you haven't read the point one issue) and does a more than able job establishing the basics with each character in an amusing fashion. This issue is definitely worth checking out if you're curious about what is sure to become Marvel's biggest cosmic team. We're off to a very good start, Bendis... now let's dive deep into this story!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #2

Apr 24, 2013

It doesn't take a genius to see the King has set everything up from the get-go and Grood will save the day since he's currently left behind, but I'd be a total liar if I said I wasn't pretty excited to pick up the next issue. I was never big on cosmic stories and honestly, I was skeptical because Bendis is on roughly a gazillion other titles, but GUARDIANS OF THE GALAXY is some mighty amusing stuff.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #3

Jun 12, 2013

As of right now, this book is basically Marvel's go-to source for popcorn entertainment. The art team is doing a stellar job, and while there is apparently a lot of gloom and doom lurking in this series' future, Bendis is bringing fantastic pacing which never fails to enthrall. The story is widely by the numbers so far, but it's being done so well that you likely won't care if you can guess what the next scene has in store for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #4

Jun 26, 2013

Yes, Bendis delivers the funnies, a decent action sequence and establishes a new mystery... but pretty much everything else from the previous plot is cast aside for now. Additionally, we have yet to see all that much depth from these characters, yet Tony Stark -- a man who clearly won't be a permanent member of the team -- gets a whole two pages to himself. Sure, they're an amusing set of panels, but I'd much rather see that time dedicated to fleshing out the primary cast of characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #5

Jul 31, 2013

Bendis continues to do what he does best: comedic banter. This book shines when we're hit with the characters spending downtime together, but when it comes to the overall narrative, AGE OF ULTRON has seemingly shoved aside the plot I was really enjoying with Peter's father and is forcing Angela into the picture. I'm sure Bendis will continue work the pre-existing plot into this new scenario, but so far it doesn't feel like an organic fit. Hopefully that'll change in the next issue and the various plot points will be given equal attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #7

Oct 16, 2013

In a series loaded with magnificent sci-fi potential, Bendis has the ability to keep matters fun even when a good chunk of the issue is just characters standing around and talking in one room. GUARDIANS OF THE GALAXY is nothing if not consistently entertaining. Clearly, that's what Marvel wants, too, since we all know they'd like to boost the popularity of these individuals before they make the leap to the big screen next summer (which I am beyond excited for, by the way). And while it is a bit overdue, this chapter finally does a fine job informing us that Angela's more than an oddly dressed woman who can demolish entire teams.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Halo: Initiation #1

Aug 14, 2013

If you've been itching to dive back into the Halo universe (and that should pretty much be anyone and everyone who enjoys the games), then you'll be pleased to know HALO: INITIATION #1 is a serviceable return to the sci-fi franchise. It does the basics building up the narrative and showing us who Palmer is, all the while throwing some alright action our way. Now that everyone knows who she is and why the UNSC is interested in here, it's time to get things rolling!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger (2012) #0.2014

Mar 19, 2014

While it isn't quite as compelling as HARBINGER's previous #0 issue about Toyo Harada (not too many books are capable of topping that), this is still a completely absorbing experience and, to me, deserves 5-stars. Sure, the timing is a little odd (or seems to be), but it's still an engrossing standalone story that hits us with some impressive character work and finally sheds some light on an interesting character. Now that they've given him a brighter spotlight, here's hoping Valiant has some big plans for the character in HARBINGER's near future. Needless to say, this is something every HARBINGER fan should pick up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harbinger (2012) #5

Oct 17, 2012

Valiant has been absolutely killing it. Each title is crafted exceptionally well and HARBINGER is all about Peter's flawed character and an assortment of superbly cool powers. With The Bleeding Monk finally taking center stage, I have a feeling you won't want to miss what's to come. Don't let the extra dollar on the price tag scare you away from this fantastic book.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger (2012) #6

Nov 21, 2012

Odds are by now you've heard nothing but praise for HARBINGER. For whatever reason, you're probably still not reading it. Maybe it's the $3.99 price tag. Maybe it's the fact you're 4 issues behind. Now is the perfect time to jump on-board Obviously reading everything up until now is preferable (TPB for #1-5 will be released in January), but Dysart's latest comic does a stellar job of making this an easily accessible read for anyone. This is the start of something truly special and you're not gonna want to miss out on it. Like Faith so bluntly puts it, "This is gonna be awesome."

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harbinger (2012) #7

Dec 19, 2012

HARBINGER is pure win. It's a book driven by a diverse cast of engaging characters and then throws in some insane powers into the mix. We still have one more character to join the squad before 'Harbinger Wars' kicks off, and that's something you should definitely look out for. Also coming up is #0 which will feature Toyo Harada's origin. That's something I'm really pumped to see. He's a truly unique character and I'm anxious to witness the events that molded him into the man he is today. HARBINGER is an excellent character study and I can't recommend it enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger (2012) #8

Jan 23, 2013

HARBINGER is all a book that'll make you care about its diverse cast. After all, what's the point of these awesome powers and violence if there's no emotional weight behind it? Even if your heart is made of ice, I'd be willing to bet characters like Faith will win you over. It's because of this that I ran through a gauntlet of emotions during this reading session. I'm legitimately concerned over one character with this cliffhanger, laughed out loud with Torque's dialogue, and felt so much bliss when Torque brought his abilities into the real world. HARBINGER is one of those rare books that creates a world that feels real, pulls you in and refuses to let go. With HARBINGER WARS so close, I'm happy to be a part of this crazy, emotional and deep fictional world.Plus, this issue has Kardashian Mermaids. Need I say more to grab your interest? Yeah, that's what I thought.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger (2012) #9

Feb 20, 2013

HARBINGER is a book you need to be reading. This has everything you'd ever want or need from a great story: fantastic characters, sharp dialogue and humor, creative powers, and plenty of fun action. Go do yourself a favor and give it an honest chance. You can thank me later for the recommendation.I know some of you are wondering if it's mandatory reading for 'Harbinger Wars.' The answer is technically no -- it's not mandatory, but I highly recommended it. After all, what good is a story if you're not connected to the characters?

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger (2012) #10

Mar 20, 2013

While this is indeed primarily an issue about Peter, it also takes strides turning the group into an actual team. They're no longer people Peter's dragging along -- they're now officially the Renegades and that should leave any fan of this series absolutely stoked for the upcoming 'Harbinger Wars.' HARBINGER continues to deliver exactly what I expect from it: sharp writing, relatable and engaging characters, and ridiculously fun use of psionic powers. Joshua Dysart can apparently do no wrong with this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger (2012) #15

Aug 14, 2013

HARBINGER #15's a super offbeat issue that'll make you laugh along with the characters as they do whatever ridiculous stuff they need to do to have a blast in California. All good things must come to an end, though, and eventually Dysart throws us in the book's brand new direction. If you're even kind of interested in the world of Harbinger, then this is an issue you absolutely cannot miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harbinger (2012) #23

May 28, 2014

HARBINGER once again proves it's a very well-written and thoroughly exciting series. The conflict between team Toyo and team Peter is massively satisfying and it leaves you beyond anxious to see what'll happen next. Yes, the big death didn't tug at my heart as much as it could have, but this is still an incredibly compelling story with consistently impressive visuals.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger Wars #1

Apr 3, 2013

HARBINGER WARS is finally here and it's off to a tremendous start. Relatively minor complaints aside, it does a more than able job setting the stage for what's to come while diving deep into characters and providing a more than fair amount of entertaining violence. Assuming HARBINGER WARS keeps at this pace (and given the publisher's track record, it's safe to say it will), it'll absolutely live up to the hype and was well worth the wait. With BLOODSHOT's brutal nature and the rich characters from HARBINGER, what's not to love?I get many of you have a limited budget and $3.99 is frightening to see on a cover, but it's totally justified here. We're talking about a 30 page issue (includes a preview for their upcoming book, QUANTUM AND WOODY, too) that actually offers character development, fun action, and lays out a solid overall narrative. It's 30 pages of pure goodness.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger Wars #2

May 1, 2013

Most big events don't have the appeal that they used to. The market feels oversaturated with them and it's far too often they seem like a cash grab instead of a legitimately fascinating concept. This isn't the case at all with HARBINGER WARS and it's a big event done right. It's hugely entertaining, changing characters and their motivations, and most important of all, will clearly have a big impact on the Valiant universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger: Omegas #1

Aug 6, 2014

Love HARBINGER? Then this should be a more than obvious purchase for you! Dysart continues to fill the script with great character moments, big displays of sheer spectacle, and crafts an overall narrative that's loaded with tension and intrigue. This is going to be a critical limited series for this franchise and this first chapter does a more than commendable job hitting us with all of the buildup and character depth. As expected, this is must read for HARBINGER fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Hawkeye (2012) #3

Oct 17, 2012

HAWKEYE has officially cemented itself as Marvel's must read book for me. It's beautiful, hilarious and captivating. Matt Fraction has struck gold with Clint Barton and I can't wait to see what else he has in store for the Avenger.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Hawkeye (2012) #4

Nov 21, 2012

Despite David Aja's art being sorely missed, HAWKEYE continues to easily be one of Marvel's best titles. 'The Tape' has a marvelous start and I have total faith that part 2 will be every bit as good, if not better. It's clear 'this 2 parter will focus on Kingpin's plot for revenge, but I wonder if we'll see something later on focusing on the other villains robbed in issue #2 as well (Tombstone, The Owl, etc). Whatever direction Fraction decides to go with Barton's future, it seems clear at the moment that the man can do no wrong with the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkeye (2012) #5

Dec 5, 2012

While the conclusion of 'The Tape' isn't ashilarious as the prior issues, it's still leagues above a vast majority of other comics sitting on the shelves today. Pulido's faces and use of shading can be jarring, although it hardly detracts from the overall enjoyment value of this issue. If you're not following HAWKEYE, you should probably rectify that mistake immediately.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Hawkeye (2012) #8

Feb 27, 2013

I know there's a mountain of hype behind this series, but trust me, it's totally warranted. This is a wondrous series and you should rush to pick up every new issue. Fraction is doing a remarkable job with the script and the book is consistently sporting a pleasantly unique and creative look. It's an overdose of fun... and you do like fun things, don't you?If I could, I'd give this issue 6/5 bros. But I can't, so I'll just have to settle for 5/5 bros.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Hawkeye (2012) #17

Mar 12, 2014

A wise person once asked, "what is love?" Well, I think we finally have an answer: love is this issue. It's simple: if you have a heart, go buy this issue right now and prepare to have it cuddled and warmed. If you think you don't have a heart, well... it's very possible this issue will make you discover that you're wrong and you'll fall in love with this completely out there and joyous read. If you think this cartoonish standalone is too wacky for you, then hey, to each their own, right? But for everyone else, this is going to be a pure delight. Long story short, Fraction continues to prove HAWKEYE is one of the best books currently available. Now if you'll excuse me, I'm going to read this again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkeye (2012) #18

Mar 26, 2014

HAWKEYE #18 begins to really ramp up Kate's story in the City of Angels. It may not be as powerful as what's going down with Clint over on the East Coast, but it's still thoroughly engaging and remains well-written. Fraction's able to make huge strides in the story without neglecting the laughs or fun, and Wu's character work fills these scenes with so much personality. I can't wait to see the follow-up to the cliffhanger with Clint, but in the meantime, this is a legitimately enjoyable read and has me curious to see where Kate's story will take her next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkeye (2012) #19

Jul 30, 2014

Matt Fraction, David Aja, and Matt Hollingsworth continue to prove HAWKEYE is one of the most creative and immersive books Marvel is publishing. Many of us likely won't be motivated enough to take the extra time to learn sign language just to see the extra dialogue in this issue, so the tactic does take a bit of a toll. But all in all, it's another solid chapter in a superb series. The layouts bring you right into Clint Barton's rundown world and, while there isn't much dialogue, Fraction's still able to tell a powerful and meaningful story. Let's just hope we don't have wait so long for the next chapter of Clint and Barney's adventure!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkeye Vs. Deadpool #1

Oct 8, 2014

HAWKEYE VS. DEADPOOL has just about everything you'd expect from it -- you know, aside from them actually fighting each other! It's establishing a mystery which is amusing enough, but that's totally overshadowed by the energetic, animated artwork and the hilarious interactions between these two characters. Duggan's story thrives on lighthearted developments and great banter, but every so often, a little bit of depth is sprinkled in, too. It prevents this from feeling too silly and manages to treat these characters with a good amount of respect. This book has the potential to take some pretty dark and twisted turns, but as of right now, it's just the right thing to read if you want to forget about your troubles and lose yourself in a fun adventure.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkeye Vs. Deadpool #4

Jan 7, 2015

By now, you should know what to expect from this limited series and this last chapter gives you a ton of it. Energetic and fun visuals? Yup. Silly banter between the heroes that'll make you laugh? Definitely. Lots of lighthearted craziness as they try to stop the villain? Absolutely. It may not be the most elaborate ending around, but it's plenty of fun and does a great job celebrating both of these characters' worlds in an amusing way. It's a good time, so give it a shot if you just want sit back and get lost in an enjoyably ridiculous and entertaining adventure.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Hulk (2008) #10

Jul 10, 2013

The math is simple, folks. Waid Scalera/Staples Hulk/Daredevil = an issue you should be reading right now. Seriously, stop reading this review and go buy this issue. It's quite possibly the most fun you'll have with a comic all week and it's backed up by some absolutely wonderful and remarkable art. You've earned a good time, so go reward yourself and check out this book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hulk (2014) #4

Jun 11, 2014

Waid leaves Hulk's world on a note that's both exciting and intriguing. The brawl is swift yet riveting and the second half of the book opens the door to unlimited possibilities. Basically, this issue's a double-edged sword. It's a shame Waid's saying goodbye to Banner, but he's leaving on a note that's fun and paves a new and legitimately attention-grabbing path for the title. Thanks for the good times, Waid. Duggan, you're up!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hulk (2014) #7

Oct 15, 2014

Gerry Duggan and Mark Bagley's story still has my interest and there's no doubt I want to see how it'll all unfold, but aside from a funny opening, the rest of the chapter went by without ever leaving that much of an impact. The laughs that aren't that big, the action isn't epic, and the developments feel more like teasers. It was just an okay chapter and, instead of reflecting on what just happened, I'm left feeling far more curious about what will happen. That said, I'm guessing big fans of Skaar will have a pretty unpleasant reaction to this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hulk (2014) #12

Mar 4, 2015

HULK may not be all that compelling or jaw-dropping right now, but it's consistently solid and absolutely a good time. It offers a steady dose of enjoyable comedy, fun bits of action, and continues delivering plenty of plot progression. What started off as a seemingly basic story ("approach character, cure character, move on to the next one!") has branched out and become so much more interesting. Sure, the basic formula is still there, but with the A.I. playing a significant role and the tension for the big showdown increasing, this has become a story that has me honestly guessing where it'll go next. Having energetic visuals bring all of this fun to life certainly doesn't hurt, too!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Imperial #1

Aug 6, 2014

IMPERIAL has a very familiar concept: "average joe" faces a surreal and larger than life duty. Whether your every day kind of person can rise to the occasion and become a hero is something we've seen time and time again across countless superhero stories, but IMPERIAL has enough charm and personality to capture your interest and definitely has a ton of fun with the common premise. I'll absolutely stick around to see where this goes next and it's looking like this title has opened the door to a whole lot of interesting character development. Let's hope it delivers on that potential!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Imperium #1

Feb 4, 2015

IMPERIUM #1 is smart and entertaining, gorgeous yet gruesome, and character-driven yet large in scope. Thanks to a strong creative team, it's an issue that'll appeal to you on many levels and leaves you wondering when you'll be able to read the next issue. Toyo Harada's a compelling character and this is proof of that. New readers may still be asking a lot of questions about the supporting cast, but I'm sure they'll be addressed in due time. For now, this was a phenomenal opening that told us everything we need to know about Harada while also getting a better understanding of just how far he'll go to get what he wants. I know many of you already go beyond your budget with weekly comics, but this is more than worthy of your $3.99, people.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Imperium #2

Mar 4, 2015

IMPERIUM is pretty much everything I'd want from a Valiant title. It's embracing elements from the creative universe, offers a smart script and has visuals that match the story's tone so well. Not many books can balance character and huge action, but IMPERIUM does it with ease. It's the kind of book that drops a whole lot of exposition for new readers but does it in a way that won't bother pre-existing fans at all because it feels like natural dialogue and, more importantly, it doesn't get in the way of moving the story and its characters forward. Do the right thing and add this title to your pull list.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Indestructible Hulk #4

Feb 20, 2013

Astonishing artwork and an ingenious script makes THE INDESTRUCTIBLE HULK a must read for anyone interested in the character. There's a few moments where the art feels incomplete, but that's vastlyoutweighedby the amount of panels that'll stun your eyes. The cliffhanger isn't all that compelling, but the quality of this book has me confident that whatever comes next will definitely be a good time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Indestructible Hulk #5

Mar 20, 2013

Waid's formula is certainly working. It gives both characters adequate time to shine, bringing a nice balance of intellect and pure popcorn entertainment to the title. That said, it is a redundant and predictable approach, so hopefully Waid will begin to spice things up and throw a curve ball or two our way. After all, we all know he certainly has the talent to do so.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Indestructible Hulk #7

May 1, 2013

Not only is this latest chapter absurdly funny and pretty energetic, but it's plentiful on story, too. While none of the twists are likely to take your breath away, they are legitimately interesting and it makes this trip by far the most promising story we have yet to see from the series. I'm not a big fan of sports idioms, but I think saying, "Waid knocked it out of the park with this issue" is absolutely appropriate. It's simply a good time.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Indestructible Hulk #9

Jun 19, 2013

This is easily my favorite issue this week and I have yet to read everything in my pile. That's how downright enjoyable this chapter is. Waid's script is superb, the art is stellar, and the overall narrative manages to intrigue while still offering plenty of smiles and fun set pieces. This is a good jumping on point, so you should probably go ahead and do that if you're not currently reading this series. Seriously, do it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Indestructible Hulk #11

Jul 31, 2013

On the surface, the premise seems pretty complex, but Waid simplifies it and clearly turns it into something hilarious and super entertaining. The ending is a real attention grabber and I can't wait to see all of the crazy fun Waid is going to have with this story. If you previously told me AGE OF ULTRON was going to take over numerous titles I would be pretty bummed out. However, Waid manages to spin a negative into a positive and it totally works. Thrown in Scalera's brilliant illustrations and you have yet another issue of INDESTRUCTIBLE HULK which is beyond worthy of five-stars.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Indestructible Hulk #12

Aug 21, 2013

Somehow, Waid simplifies the complexities of time travel and spins it into one insanely good time. The man has been absolutely killing it with this book's script and Scalera and Staples are more than able to breathe an overwhelming amount of life into the crazy scenarios thrown their way. You're reading Marvel wrong if this book isn't on your pull list.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Indestructible Hulk #13

Sep 11, 2013

This series continues to be an absurd amount of fun. On paper, this premise is downright ridiculous, but thanks to Waid's creativity and clear desire to make things all kinds of fun, it works extraordinarily well and is escapism at its finest. To top it off, Scalera and Staples are always able to provide visuals that'll live up to Waid's inventive scenarios. If you just want to enjoy a laugh and have a dose of high quality amusement, it really doesn't get much better than INDESTRUCTIBLE HULK.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Indestructible Hulk #14

Oct 23, 2013

Issue after issue, Waid hits us with a fantastic sense of fun as Hulk faces new and wacky variables during his adventure through time. It comes as no surprise at all that this issue is no exception. Waid bringing Hulk back to his origin gives him the opportunity to hit us with quite a few pleasing moments and he throws some wonderful twists into the mix. This is yet another great issue that shouldn't be overlooked.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Indestructible Hulk #15

Nov 20, 2013

Using a time travel story to dive into Hulk's origin holds the potential for retcons and big changes, but thankfully, Waid moves the Green Goliath through the complex experience without implementing any lasting alterations. Instead, he uses this finale as an opportunity to open the door to his next story. Ultimately, though, the excitement this arc has offered is toned down in this issue and this winds up being an alright end to a very wild and out there story. Despite not being head over heels with this conclusion, this storyline is still well-worth reading.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Indestructible Hulk Annual #1

Dec 4, 2013

INDESTRUCTIBLE HULK ANNUAL #1 definitely isn't a bad comic, but it feels very by the numbers. If you're an avid fan of the series, it doesn't really come off as a mandatory read since there's only a small development with Wolman -- one which could easily be brought up down the road during exposition, anyway. Odds are it won't wow you, but if you really love both characters, then it's certainly an amusing side-mission for you to enjoy and there's a good laugh or two waiting for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Indestructible Hulk: Special #1

Oct 16, 2013

INDESTRUCTIBLE HULK #1 is an example of how mixed art can weigh down a solid script. There's some animated panels to be found, but there's plenty of small visual gripes along the way and overall, it takes a toll on the issue's quality. Seeing as this story has been a fairly good dose of fun, I'll definitely stick around for the third (and final) chapter. It's worth picking up if you really enjoyed the first chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #1

Jan 16, 2013

For just $0.99, there's no reason to miss out on this if you're even remotely excited for 'Injustice: Gods Among Us.' Just like many of you, I'm curious about why Superman becomes a dictator and what happens to make that world take such a tragic turn.It'll be particularly interesting to see if this limited series also dives into why the power levels will fluctuate enough to make these character face off evenly in the game (I've heard some explanation will be given for that... you know, aside from "dude, it's a fighting game"). 'Injustice: Gods Among Us' comes out April 16 and this digital only series will definitely add onto the massive amount of anticipation. Hopefully it'll also bring a greater level of appreciation when beginning the game's story mode. In the meantime, give this a shot if you're also pumped for the game.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #2

Jan 22, 2013

We know things need to take one helluva dark turn for Superman to make such a drastic change and so far this script is doing an able job building us up to that breaking point. I can only imagine what Joker and Harley Quinn were doing to Lois. What's their master plan? Throw in anupcomingSuperman vs. Doomsday and you bet I'm stoked for next Tuesday!I'm legitimately loving this digital comic. It's concise, looks fantastic and simply a goodtime. At just $0.99, there's no reason to miss out on this if you're pumped for the game.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #3

Jan 29, 2013

The odds are strong you're going into this issue aware that fear gas is playing some kind of a role, but what happens next is something you probably won't predict and feels like a punch to the gut. A lot of conclusions don't do the term "cliffhanger" justice -- this one does. It's too bad we need to wait until next Tuesday to see how everyone will react to this diabolical development. At just $0.99 per short issue, you really shouldn't pass on this. Not a fan of digital comics but want to read this? Fear not, a hard copy of issues #1-3 will come out this Wednesday. I obviously recommend it, especially if you're excited for the game.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #4

Feb 5, 2013

Who truly thought a digital comic serving as a prequel for a fighting video game could be thisgood?Every Tuesday I'm blown away by the latest short issue and would even love to see this fleshed out into an ongoing alternate universe title. The characters are written superbly, the art does a more than able job bringing these powerful moments to life and every ending manages to impress. I've said it before and I'll say it again, this is a must read if you're even remotely interested in the game or just want to read an excellent elseworlds comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #5

Feb 12, 2013

INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US #5 takes a break from the bleak Superman/Batman/Joker conflict and instead provides us with a consistently funny and fairly heartwarming chapter. Filled with laughs and an engaging "team-up" between Haley Quinn and Green Arrow, this digital comic has won me over yet again. I really can't recommend this title enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #6

Feb 19, 2013

While this is obviously a must read digital series for anyone excited for the game, I dare to say it's also a must read for anyone searching for a stellar story. Each digital chapter might be a quick read (under two dozen pages), but that most certainly doesn't make it any less compelling and engrossing. This is without question the best thing you'll get for $0.99 every Tuesday.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #7

Feb 26, 2013

INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US may be a short read but don't think for even a second that means it's lacking in content or quality. This digital comic can easily hold its own with some of the best comics out there. The characters are written exceptionally well and the plot continues to shock us each and every week. In my interview with Tom Taylor, he said he's "in for the long haul" with this series and hopes we are too. Well, I can confidently say I would love to see this comic carry on just as long as any other ongoing out there. Each issue is simply brilliant and you really shouldn't be missing out on this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #8

Mar 5, 2013

Gasp! The first four out of five for the series! Fear not, this is by no means a bad issue. It's still a great read and easily one of the best things you can get for $0.99. However, this issue feels mostly like build-up for the bigger things that'll come next. I can still confidently say this is a must read story even if you're not going to buy the game. It can totally stand on its own feet as a fantastic Elseworlds tale.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #9

Mar 12, 2013

Another Tuesday, another awesome issue. Simply put: All DC fans should be reading this. It doesn't matter if you have zero interest in the game or even no knowledge of the characters. You don't need to purchase the game to appreciate the story here and this is title is totally new reader friendly. And, if you think this is just an unoriginal "Oh, no! Superman is evil again!" story, then I challenge you to check out an issue or two with an open mind. Give it an honest chance and I'm fairly confident you'll be pleased. The issues may be short, but they're packed with solid writing, strong developments moving towards the overall narrative, and in this case, excellent artwork. This has been a staggeringly good tale and I'm thrilled to read more next Tuesday.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #10

Mar 19, 2013

I seriously feel like a broken record here. Every Tuesday a new chapter comes out, and every Tuesday I sing its praise. This is a hugely entertaining tale packed into short and immensely enjoyable chapters. Superman's actions are now reaching Atlantis and that is absolutely something to be thrilled about. We know Aqauman will play a big role in the upcoming game (or at least trailers have implied this), so what's to come should absolutely be a mandatory reading experience for anyone interested in the game. Plus, we're about to see Shazam potentially throwdown. That alone is something I refuse to miss!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #11

Mar 26, 2012

Regardless of my visual complaints, INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US continues to be one of the best series from DC and is well worth the mere $0.99 cover price every Tuesday.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #12

Apr 2, 2013

Injustice Day (that's every Tuesday if you haven't been following along) continues to rock. I'm not a fan of phrases like "the most bang for your buck," but the saying applies so darn well in this case. Yes, it's shorter than a standard issue, but that's irrelevant since the quality is well above the majority of titles populating the stands. It continues to be a short and phenomenal read and, seeing as it's just $0.99, there's really no reason to miss out if you're interested in this elseworlds tale.And since someone always asks: no, you don't need to purchase the game to appreciate the read. Writer Tom Taylor has confirmed this series will continue past the game's release date. Oh, and did I mention a demo for the game is hitting XBLA and PSN today, too (for the US... tomorrow for everyone else)? Because it totally is.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #15

Apr 23, 2013

While I enjoyed Aquaman story, I felt like it like it was a step down from the events that came before it. One scene aside, the stakes didn't feel as gripping or engaging. This story, however, puts the comic back on track, placing a strong focus on the Batman/Superman agenda and surrounding it with legitimately exciting and fun interactions. With shockingly impressive artwork, sharp dialogue and a fine cliffhanger (even if we do likely know how it'll turn out), INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US #15 has me absolutely pumped to read #16 next Tuesday.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #16

Apr 30, 2013

Tom Taylor and Mike S. Miller have raised the bar with #16. It's a true sign of brilliance when a predictable outcome still manages to tug at your heartstrings and leave you speechless. Not only does the latest effort pack one helluva cliffhanger, but it's sporting great visuals and, up until the end, is a huge amount of fun. If I could, I'd give this issue 6 out of 5 stars. But I can't, so 5 out of 5 will have to suffice. This is a must read issue, friends. And, if you're inspired to jump onboard, I highly recommend reading #15 first.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #17

May 7, 2013

While #17 doesn't have any moments that'll floor you or make you hold back manly tears, it still manages to serve as yet another enjoyable chapter in the series. Witnessing Selina hit Clark with a heavy dose of logic was an unexpected yet most welcome touch, and, despite one questionable panel, the conclusion is a short yet somber reaction to last issue's cliffhanger.I'm really hoping we'll get a chapter revolving primarily around Damian or Bruce. Placing a strong emphasis on how they're reacting to the tragedy has the potential to be an emotional hurricane, especially if they're forced to simultaneously deal with the greater dispute.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #18

May 14, 2013

If this chapter doesn't get you excited for what's about to go down in this alternate universe, then I just don't know what will. There's a slow burn when it comes to Clark's transition and it's great to see he didn't simply go from heartbreak to heartless overnight. The roster continues to grow and Batman is finally building his rebellion to take on Clark's regime. How everything unfolds from here has yet to be revealed, but if you've played the game or even know the basics, then you know the odds aren't in Bruce's favor. Does that mean these characters are destined to meet a grim fate or will Taylor have them go down a different and unexpected path? I have no idea, but I'm definitely stoked to find out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #19

May 21, 2013

It's unfortunate we have to wait to see the developments with Batman and his team, but in the meantime, this issue revolves around what Taylor does best: characterization (unless you're a Wonder Woman fan, that is). It's easy to relate to Billy's struggle and I'm extremely interested to see where the character will go from here. Just because we know the outcome doesn't mean we know the journey and that's something Taylor continues to prove to us every Tuesday.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #20

May 28, 2013

This series continues to make Tuesdays worth celebrating. Whether you're a fan of the game or just enjoying this digital series on its own, you'll hopefully agree this is commendable issue for changing the status quo and doing a superb job teasing the series' future. If you are indeed a fan of the game, then the introduction of this character should absolutely have you exited because their role is most definitely an intriguing one in the campaign. And, if you haven't played the game, this should still be a cool moment simply because it brings about a massive change. And finally, if you haven't even been reading along but you're curious about the series, this issue can serve as an excellent jumping on point. I of course recommend reading everything leading up to this, but I understand that may be too expensive of an option for some.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #21

Jun 4, 2013

At this point, it should be more than obvious who Batman's secret weapon is (*cough* Martian Manhunter *cough*) and I'm ridiculously excited to see where Taylor will take matters from here. If you've been following along or if you've been meaning to jump on board, this is absolutely a must read issue. Major developments are made when it comes to Wayne's actions against the Man of Steel and we get a disturbing look at who Wonder Woman truly is in this alternate universe. At just $0.99 per short chapter, you really have no good reason not to follow along if you're curious about the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #23

Jun 18, 2013

Now I'm left wondering what'll happen with Diana and the plane... it definitely seemed like she saved the day at first, but then we had the panel of the Parademons attacking her. I guess we'll see next Tuesday!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #24

Jun 25, 2013

Now that Superman has made a drastic change to his morals and the people of Earth apparently love it, I'm curious to see how Taylor will handle the aftermath of this invasion. With Lex by Superman's side and Batman's rebellion waiting to strike (not to mention his secret weapon is still in play), I'm very, very anxious to see what's next. Once again, you should be reading this series. I cannot stress that enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #25

Jul 2, 2013

Tom Taylor is on fire. We're now 25 chapters into this digital comic and it has yet to take any kind of significant dive in quality. I wasn't the biggest fan of the Aquaman story, but the series remains strong and this is a downright awesome chapter. Perfectly mixing humor and drama while still delivering some fun action, Taylor continues to make INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US one of the most enjoyable reading experiences DC has to offer. The fact it's only $0.99 and comes out every Tuesday is just icing on this absurdly delicious DC cake.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #26

Jul 9, 2013

A fighting game's story with a chapter that can thrive without action of any kind? Such a thought is madness, right? Well, this issue proves otherwise. INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US may revolve around one savage event and how it changes everything, but this issue proves the book can thrive and remain gripping without even the lightest amount of physical conflict. Taylor continues to show he has a respectable understanding of these characters and can always be counted on to produce thoroughly entertaining plot progression and dialogue. INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US delivers yet again.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #28

Jul 23, 2013

It was so easy to assume where the plot would go after last chapter's revelations and the opening makes it seem like business as usual, but then Taylor throws a curveball and I guarantee NONE of you will expect it. It's beyond hilarious and brings the narrative in a whole new direction -- it's a ginormous game changer. Combine that with the sharp character writing and I'm beyond anxious to pick up the next chapter. Where will things go from here? I cannot wait to find out next Injustice Day (aka Tuesday).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #29

Jul 30, 2013

Corresponding with the video game, this latest issue puts a strong focus on Martian Manhunter and organically places him into this world's conflict. Throw in some a few terrific panels and chapter 29 is yet another solid addition to the series. It may not be the best issue yet, but it's still damn good and continues to prove why I adore this book. We still have one more issue in this specific storyline, so I'm super anxious for next Tuesday's issue. How will Batman react to these developments? Will Taylor deliver on a big moment for Green Arrow? GET HERE FASTER, TUESDAY.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #30

Aug 6, 2013

Chapter 30 is a heartwarming experience that'll make you appreciate the classic age of optimism and even miss it a good deal. Sure, it's a total departure from the dramatic overall narrative, but it's a welcome one thanks to Taylor's sharp script and Redondo's solid work with lively emotions. Overall, it's a pleasant little break from the dire and tense events this series usually throws our way and it's definitely one you'll appreciate.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #31

Aug 13, 2013

Every now and then a book hits you with an ending worthy of exclaiming, "holy $#*&!" INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US #31? Yeah, it's totally a chapter that'll do that to you. Taylor has a history of doing wonderful work with Green Arrow and this is no exception. We're finally diving into a watershed moment which I've been anxious to see unfold for quite some time now. It's not a scene I necessarily want to happen, but there's no denying the massive potential behind the moment and, luckily for us, it has a more than solid set up thus far.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #32

Aug 20, 2013

Sure, this chapter essentially boils down to one extended fight (with awesome artwork), but Taylor still does enough to move all of the pieces forward when it comes to hitting us with the big moment that's sure to come. If you're a fan of the game, odds are you know what's around the corner, but just because we know the end result doesn't mean we know how it'll play out at all, does it? This is something the book consistently proves to us and I'm excited to see how they'll handle the next big scene inspired by the game's narrative. In the meantime, this is yet another issue which fails to impress. It doesn't dive into the heavy morals or feels the universe has to offer, but it does present plenty of super-powered punches which look fantastic and are hugely amusing.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #33

Aug 27, 2013

There's no question I'd give this issue a 4.5 if I had the ability to give half-stars. Superman's decision to continue attacking Ollie feels a bit too drastic based on how we've seen him conduct himself. It almost seems like an abrupt push to turn him into the evil man we know in the game. But, despite that personal gripe, what follows is masterfully handled and delivers a wicked emotional punch. Overall, I did indeed love this issue and the sheer emotion it made me experience vastly outweighs my complaint over how we got there. Because of that, this is yet another chapter that'll earn 5-stars.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #35

Sep 10, 2013

The momentum has been building and building for quite some time now, and this long anticipated encounter feels organic instead of totally forced. It's unlike the other encounters we've seen between the two and it's sure to leave you shocked. Opinions will definitely to be mixed on this development, but I think it was brilliantly executed and awesomely engrossing. Given everything that has happened and the relationship they share, I can absolutely see how this was a feasible solution for one of them.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us #36

Sep 17, 2013

I have good news and bad news. The bad news is this is the last chapter (annual aside) until 2014. Tragic, I know. However, the good news is that Tom Taylor and everyone else involved left us with a beyond stellar issue that'll make you want to cheer. This chapter also serves as a brilliant way to further the divide between Bruce and Clark. What occurs could have easily been treated as the series' conclusion and we'd be left assuming 5 years transpire before the game begins. But no, we're going to get even more in January and that, my friends, is very awesome and absolutely something to look forward to.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Gods Among Us Annual #1

Nov 13, 2013

We've gone two months without anything new from the INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US universe and thankfully, this annual issue is more than enough to tide us over until the series returns in January. You know how you loved the Harley Quinn and Green Arrow team-up back in Year One? It's basically like that, but instead of being crammed into a digital copy, it's fleshed out in an annual-sized issue and throws in plenty of wackiness with Lobo. It's absurd in all the right ways and is sure to keep you laughing. Oh, and that ending? It seems like something so crazy that it could only happen in a fan fiction. And, you know what? It's pure awesome. Talk about ending on a high note, right?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #1

Sep 30, 2014

YEAR ONE was a chaotic ride that was full of twists and turns. YEAR TWO gave us time to let all of those big events sink in and offered some character-driven chapters before hitting us with over-the-top action. YEAR THREE? It's looking like it'll be a big ol' dose of fun, and that's something that'll bring this book in a refreshing direction.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Year Three #2

Oct 7, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE #2 is a real delight. It's a chapter that balances comedy and plot progression extraordinarily well. Throw in consistently solid visuals to boost all of the gags and the end result is a thoroughly entertaining and funny read. We're just two chapters in and I'm rooting for Constantine big time. You know what that means, right? It means it'll be so heartbreaking if (more like when) the character is killed off. Ultimately, we know Superman stays in power when all is said and done, but this is turning out to be a wonderfully lighthearted and engaging story arc. Now we just have to wait and see if Taylor will give the world what it deserves: a full chapter of Constantine teaming-up with Harley Quinn.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #3

Oct 14, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE #3 doesn't have the same level of laughs as the previous 2 chapters, but that's okay because the story takes a big step forward. Instead of dragging out this mystery about what powerful force is lurking out there, the reveal makes quite an entrance (pun once again totally intended) and the bit leaves you wondering what the heck will happen next. Yes, there's still a few moments of levity to enjoy, but this third chapter focuses on reminding us just how important this mission is to Batman's side and then leaves us with the promise of a thrilling follow-up. Who would have thought a digital comic based on a video game would be so consistently good?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #4

Oct 21, 2014

The narrative doesn't take any big steps and I still have a lot of questions about Spectre's role, but this fourth chapter solidifies the connection between the two leads and offers a nice amount of spectacle as magic is put to use. There aren't any big jaw-droppers and Taylor goes for a more subtle cliffhanger this time around, but it's still well-written, looks lovely, and there's a moment in here that DC fans are sure to appreciate. All in all, this is yet another good chapter of INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #6

Nov 4, 2014

INJUSTICE: GODS AMONG US is known for its shock value and jaw-dropping developments, but this one is all about teasing YEAR THREE's future. If you're a fan of the mystical side of DC's universe, there's a double splash page in here that is sure to make you stick around. And, if you're wondering where a certain injured character has been, well, let's just say their return is pretty blatantly teased. There's even another big teaser in there; one which has me scratching my head. Could it just be a nod to what happens several years down the road or is Tom Taylor going to hit us with a huge surprise? Only time shall tell and I'm absolutely going to stick around to see how it all plays out. You'd think a weekly series would begin to lose steam in its third volume, but INJUSTICE is still great. This chapter may not have big action or big laughs, but it does a more than satisfying job building up the hype for what's to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #7

Nov 11, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE #6 dropped some major foreshadowing. INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE #7? It rushes ahead and finally presents us with the conflict we've been waiting to see. Now we just need to wait a little longer to witness how it'll play out! The road getting to the event may not be all that elaborate or compelling, but it's yet another well-written look at this twisted universe and the pages are sure to keep your eyes engaged. And that cliffhanger? Man, the next chapter is sure to be an especially exciting one, isn't it?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #9

Nov 25, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE #9 does a fine job reminding us of just how far Superman fallen and it's a nice contrast to the brief focus Taylor places on Billy Batson's sense of hope and optimism. It's a character-driven ride that gives us just the right dose of Constantine without allowing him to overshadow the other characters like he has in previous chapters. It's pretty much focused on the drastically different personalities and looks consistently solid, but then it drops a very neat twist; it's something that's more than likely enough to make readers stick around for the next chapter. I'm sure some of you will think a majority of this chapter is filler and I wouldn't argue with that point, but it's still handled well and absolutely kept me entertained.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #10

Dec 2, 2014

The best word to describe INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE #10 is "exciting." Not only does it have a cliffhanger that might make you jump for joy and anxiously await the next issue, but it's also overflowing with tension as it takes steps towards some very, very promising conflicts. Just because INJUSTICE is a video game prequel it doesn't mean we know the whole picture and it can't surprise us. We may know who's in the video game's story, but the road getting there and seeing how it impacts everyone along the way continues to be a total blast. This issue is proof of that and I'm very curious to see what'll go down in the next chapter. INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE is doing an awesome job balancing all of the death, darkness, and chaos with some legitimate laughs and cheerworthy surprises. It's a great read and fans of the video game need to check it out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #11

Dec 9, 2014

Not having any follow-up to last week's excellent cliffhanger's a bit of a bummer, but that's countered by some great writing and consistently enjoyable visuals. The strong writing is enough to make you wonder what a CONSTANTINE or HARLEY QUINN ongoing series would be like if Taylor was writing. The narrative continues to grow and grow and the script makes sure this is dialogue that'll keep you interested and entertained instead of feeling like it's just more and more exposition until things finally reach a boiling point. The cliffhanger may not pack as much of a punch as it could have, but it's still something that'll probably make you smile and leave you wondering about what'll happen next. YEAR THREE's trip into DC's mystical side has been a great ride. Now we just have to wait and see how a certain mystery is handled!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #12

Dec 16, 2014

The Spectre's story seems to be moving along pretty slowly (it's looking like that may change soon), but the rebels' mission against Superman takes a huge and very promising step forward. Yes, if you've been paying close enough attention it's something you probably saw coming a mile away, but that doesn't change it from being all kinds of exciting and being a development that's full of potential. A whole new stage has been set. One character is out of commission, another is probably ready to unleash all kinds of hell. Then there's the other big developments which happened in the previous issues (the new Deadman!) and Madam Xanadu's teasers. The INJUSTICE universe is never a boring place, is it? Three volumes in and this is still an incredibly entertaining ride.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Year Three #13

Dec 23, 2014

Minor criticisms about the current narrative not making any progress just isn't enough to counter how fun and captivating it was to return to the beginning and witness how things could have gone differently.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Year Three #14

Dec 30, 2014

Taylor's time with INJUSTICE ends with a chapter that'll have you smiling, feeling a little nostalgic and hoping for a better tomorrow. If this wasn't his final chapter, I'd be disappointed we're taking a break from the bigger picture (especially for a character who's going to get meaner and meaner), but given his love for the Man of Steel and what this alternate universe has done to the iconic hero, it's understandable he wanted his final (for now?) tale to be a far more heartfelt experience. It didn't get my tears flowing, but it sure was touching and a very appropriate way for the writer to leave the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #15

Jan 6, 2015

It's sad to see Taylor go, but it looks like the franchise is being left in capable hands. Buccellato's continuation of Taylor's story feels like more of the same, and I'm sure many of you will agree that's a very good thing. From just the right amount of levity to the huge amount of buildup and character, INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE #15 does a proper job bringing Wonder Woman back while also adding more to the narrative. I'm curious to see how Buccellato will handle the rest of the cast (especially Harley Quinn) and the cosmic developments Taylor put in place, but for right now, this is a promising start to his time with the series. Plus, there's a panel or two that are legitimately beautiful, and honestly, who could have expected that from this series? There's plenty plenty of stunning panels in INJUSTICE'S history, but Miller and Nanjan did a terrific job with the opening.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #16

Jan 13, 2015

Taylor left the series with a whole lot of story arcs up in the air and Buccellato's doing a fine job juggling them. He's bringing some awesome fun (yes,"awesome fun" is what I'm going with) to the series while also racing some of the plot points forward. It's unclear when or how he'll get into some of the series' bigger mysteries, but for now, he's certainly keeping me entertained and has yet to disappoint.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #17

Jan 20, 2015

This chapter left me debating between 3 and 4-stars for a good amount of time. There's a handful of smaller criticisms and they really do begin to add up, but I'm guessing a number of them won't be an issue if you're not all that into power levels and what not. Despite the complaints, I was still very entertained by this chapter and it did leave me looking forward to the next one. The focus on character isn't as strong as it once was and the main plot is moving at a gazillion miles per hour, but given all of the plot threads Buccellato has to work with, it's understandable he's trying to give each of them some progress in some very, very fun and exciting ways. It's looking like things are about to get even more chaotic, but once the dust settles from that next brawl, it would be nice to see things slow down just a bit so the series can offer a little more heart and personality. In the meantime, I'm enjoying the action-packed madness.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Injustice: Year Three #19

Feb 3, 2015

INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE #19 has no problem delivering lots of spectacle. With strong coloring, consistently solid illustrating and a whole lot of action, there's a fair amount of good fun to enjoy here. However, the focus on crazy fighting seems to get in the way of making sure the story's as impactful as it could be and it unfortunately feels like the characters' personalities (aside from the surprise character) could use more attention. I still found myself completely absorbed while reading this chapter and the action did look good, but I'm really hoping the story and dialogue get a little more of the spotlight in the next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #1

Jan 7, 2014

Yes, this is technically a jumping on spot, although I obviously recommend reading Volume 1 at some point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #2

Jan 21, 2014

It should come as no surprise by now, but the INJUSTICE series remains superb. It's more than transparent YEAR TWO won't feel like a blatant rehash of the first volume. Instead of feeling like a book that primarily revolves around Batman and Superman, Taylor's now giving other characters the chance to step up and, so far, he's proving he's more than capable of writing each one very well and making them feel like a critical part of the universe. Simply put: this issue is pure setup and it's guaranteed to make you want to see what'll happen next. Tuesdays are so much better now that INJUSTICE is back.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #3

Feb 11, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO #3 is all about showing subtle changes in Hal Jordan while also setting the stage for some very promising new plot points. Nothing here is going to stun you, but it's absorbing and certain to leave you anxious to see how the next chapter will unfold. After the last issue's cliffhanger, I can't help but wonder what'll happen with the new character. I'm sure we all have our theories -- especially if you know the development Hal will eventually undergo -- but only time will reveal what Taylor has in store for us. It's just too bad need to wait two weeks until the next chapter. Thankfully, this series is worth the wait.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #4

Feb 25, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR ONE had one explosive event after the next in virtually every issue. With INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO, you can tell Taylor's moving all of the pieces into place and building up the tension before we're hit with something legitimately massive. Sure, there's shocking and thrilling moments here and there, but you can really feel the story inching closer and closer to something game-changing. At any rate, this series is still a real teat. It remains well-written and looks solid. This isn't just a must read series for fans of the game. It's a must read series if you enjoy great writing, and that's something everyone appreciates, right? Now comes the tough part: waiting two weeks for a new chapter!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #5

Mar 11, 2014

I have a feeling a number of you won't be as enthusiastic as I am about this one (especially based on the community's response to the last installment), but I think Taylor's doing a great job delivering a huge amount of buildup. It's a concise, well-written and visually satisfying issue which assures the book will take a more explosive turn sooner rather than later. The tension continues to grow and there's no doubt it'll make you anxious to see what stems from this development. Now comes the tough part: waiting two more week's for the next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Year Two #6

Mar 25, 2014

I'll be blunt: I love this issue. Not only does it do a tremendous job building the hype for what's to come, but it's incredibly well-written and consistently good looking. It'll make you laugh, it'll hit you right in the feels, and it'll absolutely make you excited for the series' future. There's been a whole lot of buildup in this volume so far, and, based on the writer's history, I'd like to believe that Taylor will make the upcoming showdown well worth the wait. We all know Superman's regime will still be in power 3 years from this point, but this series has proved time and time again that knowing the future hardly takes away from what occurs in the present. Needless to say, I'm stoked to see what what'll happen next in YEAR TWO. Seriously, you should be reading this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Injustice: Year Two #7

Apr 8, 2014

Sinestro's a character that has always appealed to me, so it should come as no surprise this latest chapter kept a pretty good grip on my interest. The presentation of Thaal's tale is intelligently executed, but you can't help but feel that it's a major departure from the "big picture." Yes, it's completely understandable that Sinestro needs to be given depth -- especially for new readers -- but ultimately, it doesn't bring anything new to the overall narrative or pack the same kind of punch and intrigue that the other chapters possess. It's still an enjoyable issue, but given the fact so many promising plot points are floating around, it would be been great to have it tackle more than just Sinestro's past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #10

May 27, 2014

Tom Taylor has been delivering a slow burn in this volume and this latest issue feels like a return to the familiar. What's the familiar for INJUSTICE, you ask? Jaw-dropping shockers, that's what. The first battle wasn't quite as epic as it could have been, but Taylor's solid script, steady laughs and a gripping cliffhanger more than compensate up for that. INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO is a series that knows how to hit all of the right emotions. It'll make you laugh, wow you with spectacle, and even shatter your heart. Now comes the hard part: waiting 2 weeks for the next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #11

Jun 10, 2014

Just when you think the situation can't get any crazier, Taylor goes above and beyond to keep things interesting and drops developments that are full of potential. The stakes keep rising and rising in this book and this creative team always knows how to leave us on just the right note. This is yet another issue that'll leave you anxious to buy the next one.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Injustice: Year Two #12

Jun 24, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO #12 is an issue that'll make you think about the road that lies ahead of us. Sure, we know where many of the key characters are a few years after this chapter, but something huge is brewing and Taylor continues to deliver an increasing level of tension. Nothing in this chapter is going to blow you away or make you laugh out loud, but each plot point is taking steps forward and opening the door to some very exciting conflicts. Let's just hope the eventual showdowns are well worth the wait!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Year Two #13

Jul 1, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO has its moments of levity (a Guardian being creepy is unforgettable), but overall, it's taking a more serious approach as it focuses on buildup and Superman's actions as a dictator. However, this issue feels like a return to the hilarious issues writer Tom Taylor presented in the alternate universe's first year. Sure, that first volume is full of tragedy and oozes darkness, but there were plenty of good and memorable laughs sprinkled in the mix, too. And this latest issue? It's packed with hilarity as Taylor brings Harley Quinn back into the spotlight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #15

Jul 15, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO #15 offers basically all of the reasons why we've come to enjoy this series so much. The levity will have you smiling or even laughing out loud, the narrative's taking some big and interesting steps forward, and the issue leaves us on a note that pretty much guarantees you'll purchase the next chapter. YEAR TWO is still continuing its slow burn approach and the tension continues to build and build, but issues like this one do a great job boosting the hype while also making sure our interest never falters. Even if you think this one's "filler," it's more than likely going to have you curious enough to see what's right around the corner.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #16

Jul 22, 2014

Okay, you've landed one heck of a hook, INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO #16. Even if you haven't been the biggest fan of this volume, this chapter basically guarantees you'll be interested enough to read the follow-up. Whether or not the upcoming conflict lives up to the hype has yet be determined, but this chapter does a mighty fine job making sure we know it's right around the corner and I definitely want to see how it's executed. Sure, I wish Superman was a little more humanizing as he continues his evil path, but this chapter really got the narrative moving full speed ahead and I can't wait to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #17

Jul 29, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO #17 is yet another chapter that leaves me hooked and waiting until next Tuesday for more. The slowburn approach is beginning to take a toll and I wish we'd see a little more humanity in Kal-El, but I'd be a total liar if I said this issue hasn't left me curious and anxious to see where these plot threads will take us. The massive space battle has begun, Batman's forces are finally in motion, and we can expect to see more of the always fantastic Harley Quinn. So yeah, you can bet I'm sticking around to see what comes next!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #18

Aug 5, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO #18 offers the adrenaline pumping kind of madness you've come to expect from the franchise. The war is underway and there really is no turning back now. Yes, we all know which side wins after the dust settles and yes, it's a bit of a bummer certain characters didn't receive a little more focus (would have loved to see Black Canary, Shazam, or Hawkgirl), but the action is increasing and honestly, it's a blast. The glimpses of the attack in space are powerful and the ground assault was a fun little sequence that has now opened the door to so much more potential. It's looking like a more compelling and emotional experience is right around the corner. Unsurprisingly, I'm once again left feeling anxious to see how the next chapter will follow-up on these events.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #19

Aug 12, 2014

Ladies and gentlemen, INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO is moving full speed ahead and, based on the way things are going down, it definitely looks like it'll be all action and big developments until the volume's final chapter. We've seen plenty from Superman, Batman and others, but this chapter finally gives Hal Jordan and Sinestro a little more of the spotlight and the end result is an issue that's loaded with spectacle and big character moments. If you dropped this series because it wasn't moving fast enough for you, I'd strongly recommend jumping back on board because it looks like it's only going to get crazier from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #20

Aug 19, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO #20 brings a heavy dose of heart back to the bleak and violent universe. The plot device feels sudden and a little forced, but it doesn't take away all that much from the engrossing development and that's thanks to the way it's paced and the legitimately touching dialogue. This chapter successfully delivers a well-written and thoroughly satisfying spotlight on an important character and leaves me anxious to see how this will impact another key character's role. INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO once again has me excited to buy the next chapter. I understand some of you weren't a fan of how this volume focused on so much buildup, but these last few chapters have picked up the pace and produced events you really shouldn't miss. Here's hoping this chapter motivates Barbara to become Batgirl!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #21

Aug 26, 2014

Even though we know where everyone stands in several years from now (which is where the video game begins), this is a series that consistently manages to grab my interest and keeps me guessing. Yes, I'm very anxious to see what happens after this cliffhanger and witness more of the battles, but I'm especially anxious to see what'll go down as YEAR TWO wraps up the massive battle and shows us the aftermath.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #22

Sep 2, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO #22 gives a satisfying and action-heavy look at Black Canary's story. While it isn't quite as emotional as it could have been, it's still a very well-written and totally absorbing experience. The tension has been building for quite some time between Canary and Kal-El and their confrontation was mostly worth the wait. And the end will most definitely leave you wanting more. Usually fans of the video game can predict deaths and some of the twists, but this is a completely unexpected treat and I'm really anxious to see how it's handled.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Year Two #23

Sep 9, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO #23 is a jaw-dropper. This volume has mostly utilized a slow-burn approach and tends to incorporate only one big development per issue, but this one goes all out and kept me engaged the entire time. It's not just building up to one big cliffhanger that'll leave you stunned -- it's bringing its A game the entire ride. Minor gripes aside, this chapter does a terrific job pulling us into this harsh battle and shows us just how ugly this alternate universe has become. There's only one chapter left and this has most definitely built my anticipation for YEAR TWO's finale. Here's hoping it's every bit as epic as we want it to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Year Two #24

Sep 16, 2014

INJUSTICE: YEAR TWO comes to a very satisfying end. Much of the second volume was building up to this war and I'd say it delivered and then some. When all is said and done, this version of Earth will be in a totally different situation as we enter YEAR THREE.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Injustice: Year Two Annual #1

Oct 1, 2014

As a huge Injustice fan, I have to say that I'm pretty letdown. It's not a "bad" issue, but it doesn't pack the same kind of energy, character, and compelling conversations that we're used to seeing in the digital comic. The last annual was a brilliant and thrilling ride, but this just feels very average. The visuals in the second story, however, impress a whole lot. If you're looking for another hugely entertaining trip into the Injustice universe, odds are you'll feel a bit disappointed as well. But, if you're feeling a little curious about the Gordon family and why Hal is suddenly cool working with Sinestro, it's worth considering. Again, it's not "bad," but it's not nearly up to par with what we usually get from this universe. At least INJUSTICE: YEAR THREE #1 was really good, right?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Fist: The Living Weapon #3

Jun 4, 2014

IRON FIST: THE LIVING WEAPON #3 is a character-driven experience that attempts to balance fun and darkness, but mostly sides with the latter. Sure, there's a nice dose of levity with the hospital scenes and one specific moment in the past, but in the end, the more dire moments overshadow them. Andrews' artwork remains gripping and he dishes out some major developments in the chapter -- developments which can help me understand Rand's more stern and savage mindset in this volume. I'm sure many will have strong knee-jerk reactions to the cliffhanger, but we'll just have to wait and see what happens next!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Man (2012) #3

Dec 5, 2012

As expected with Land, everything but the women (they're always way too glamorous in my opinion) and some wonky facial expressions was solid. The book delivers a few light chuckles and moves along at a fine pace, ultimately making this a seemingly quick and pleasant read. Tony's personality feels appropriate (though I can't say I'm the biggest Stark expert around) and that's obviously key for this book. This certainly isn't a must read Stark story, but if you're searching for a fun read, this would absolutely be fitting.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Iron Man (2012) #4

Dec 10, 2012

I hate being so negative, but this issue ultimately felt like filler to me (potential future story from the cliffhanger aside, of course) and overall Gilleon's 'Believe' hasn't really done much to keep me invested in the title. Sure, Stark is written well and seeing new armors is always a good dose of fun, but in the end I can't help but feel as though each chapter is skating by on a medicore level when it comes to the overallnarrative.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Iron Man (2012) #5

Jan 2, 2013

I feel like I'm a broken record with my reviews for this story arc. It comes down to the simple fact that if you've liked the series so far or want to see how and why Tony heads to space, then this issue is worth reading. If you haven't been a fan, then odds are you'll be letdown once again and there's no real reason to justify picking this one up.Me? I'm somewhere in the middle. While this story will by no means be considered a classic or a must read, it was still a short and fairly amusing ride. Hopefully Iron Man soaring in the cosmos will set a bigger stage for the character and deliver us something fresh. Shoot for the stars, Stark.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Man (2012) #6

Feb 6, 2013

So far 'The Godkiller' is off to an enjoyable but somewhat slow start. If you dropped the book because you weren't feeling the last story arc, then I'd say go ahead and give this issue an honest chance. If you don't like it, then so be it and apologies for making you spend $3.99 (seriously, Marvel?). But, I think there's enough here to warrant giving the series a second shot. Plus, we know he's going to encounter The Guardians of the Galaxy soon, so that's absolutely something else to look forward to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Man (2012) #7

Mar 6, 2013

Let's be honest, here... this isn't a deep or a brilliant story and that clearly isn't what Gillen's aiming for. It seems as though he's seeking to create a fun adventure for Shellhead and so far I'd say he's succeeding. Gillen manages to juggle proper story development and levity quite well and, for the first time, I'm actually excited to read next month issue. Additionally, I think I'm not the only one who's very curious to see how Tony will join the Guardians of the Galaxy.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Iron Man (2012) #8

Apr 17, 2013

We'll of course find out why a cloaking device is so important in due time, but as of right now, this isn't a direction that fascinates me nearly enough to warrant $3.99 per issue to eventually learn the details. That's too bad, too, because sending Tony into space seemed like a thrilling direction, but right now I'm feeling no strong desire to continue. I suppose I'll have to wait until the Guardians of the Galaxy are slapped on the cover before I'm motivated to jump on board again... and seeing as both franchises have movies on the way, it's safe to assume that day will come sooner rather than later.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Man (2012) #9

May 1, 2013

Honestly, this issue is 3 stars for most of he ride, but it hits a strong twist and the events which follow warrants a boost to 4 stars from me. A lot is now weighing on the next issue. Will it be a brilliant twist or a disaster that'll outrage Stark fans? Only time will tell, but for now, this is a good jumping on point for the crowd that gave up on this book. It's worth noting the last story won me over with its intro but went downhill with its final act. So, let's hope history doesn't repeat itself!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Iron Man (2012) #10

May 15, 2013

I never thought I'd see the day where I'd give an issue from this series five stars, but here it is, folks. This story about Tony Stark's origin is waaaaay out there. It's wacky, great looking, fun, ridiculous and you know what? I kind of love it a whole lot. If you're looking for a spot to jump back on this series, this is it, friends. However, just be aware there's clearly some massive changes heading the Avengers' way.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Iron Man (2012) #11

Jun 5, 2013

I'm legitimately hooked. The book concludes with Tony asking 451 "So... what happened?" and I'm honestly eager to see the answer. Killen's made this controversial change all kinds of intriguing by adding just the right amounts of humor, curiosity, wackiness and downright fun. I'm right there with Tony -- I want to know what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Man (2012) #17

Oct 23, 2013

'The Secret Origin of Tony Stark' comes to a very satisfying end and it does so without throwing a single punch or firing one repulsor blast. Gillen unveils a major twist which not not only shocks, but also adds a far more humanizing approach to the book -- one which has great potential. I know a lot of you out there love spoilers, but this is a reveal you'll appreciate far more after reading the entire adventure. Doing otherwise just won't deliver the same impact.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Man (2012) #18

Nov 6, 2013

Ultimately, IRON MAN #18 is pure build-up for Gillen's next big Stark story. It does a more than thorough job laying out the basics of what Arno and Stark hope to accomplish while still teasing us with a more immediate thereat. It's somewhat disappointing there isn't more bonding between the two, but that will likely change once the story gets moving. It's a promising start and will likely be a better read in a collected edition, but for now, it is absolutely an ideal jumping on spot for potential new readers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Patriot #2

Apr 23, 2014

IRON PATRIOT #2 steps up the excitement and offers some legitimately praiseworthy and creative pages. It's by no means one of the most engaging new Marvel titles around -- at least not yet -- but this chapter definitely feels like an improvement over the first. Considering the book's about to dive into some heavy political themes, it has me interested in seeing where it'll go next and how Rhodes will handle the subject.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jupiter's Legacy #4

Mar 5, 2014

JUPITER'S LEGACY #4 is all about creating the new status quo. We jump forward several years and see firsthand how the last issue's cliffhanger has impacted both the world and the main characters. Basically, it exists to do a whole lot of world-building and thankfully, it's well-paced and engrossing. Enough intrigue is sprinkled here and there to make us interested in seeing what the future has in store for us and Millar sets the stage for a new and legitimately likable character. Sure, JUPITER'S LEGACY is clearly inspired by quite a few stories we've seen before, but it continues to expand its scope, provides an amusing commentary on the modern world and absolutely has me wondering what'll happen next.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Justice League (2011) #23.1

Sep 4, 2013

When it comes to fantasy, wonder and escapism, Greg Pak rules (see 'Planet Hulk' if you require more evidence). DC has tasked the writer with providing an all-new origin for Darkseid in The New 52 and, let me tell you, he definitely nailed it. He does a thorough job creating an absorbing story and makes the character every bit as formidable as he should be. This is without question a must read if you consider yourself a fan of Darkseid, and if not, it absolutely has the potential to turn you into one.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Justice League of America (2013) #7.1

Sep 4, 2013

I was very skeptical about DC diving back into Deadshot's origin. It was superb as is and I couldn't help but wonder if they'd rehash it or take a risk and offer something new. They went for the latter (for the most part), but Kindt did a fantastic job creating a bleak and quite shocking story for the marksman. Furthermore, he's able to tie this issue into his upcoming work on SUICIDE SQUAD, and if this is a sample of how he's going to handle that title, consider me incredibly excited.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Kick-Ass 2 #1

Aug 15, 2013

Kick-Ass 2 has no problem bringing some solid comedy and able performances to the table, but everything else which made the first movie captivating just isn't here. I feel like it never does anything to truly rise above other titles in the genre and I wound up leaving the theater thinking the movie is alright. The emotional moments don't pack the strong punch they should and the narrative definitely drags its feet every now and then. However, if you just want to laugh and enjoy some decent action, then yeah, it'll most likely deliver for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Kick-Ass 3 #1

Jun 5, 2013

And I don't know about you, but I have a terrible feeling Millar's going to break our hearts when it comes to Dave or Mindy.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Kick-Ass 3 #2

Aug 7, 2013

Millar makes ginormous progress with the overall plot, creating some massively interesting elements and presenting all kinds of new emotional drama. Meanwhile, he also manages to include plenty of his signature humor (you can't go wrong with the BATMAN: YEAR ONE scene) and hits us with just the right amount of violence and shock value. Throw in a steady flow of commendable artwork and you've got a very promising issue in Dave's final series. This issue of KICK-ASS... well, it kicks ass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Kick-Ass 3 #4

Oct 30, 2013

And Dave, next time try chilling out on the Comic Vine forums. I promise we won't annoy you!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Kick-Ass 3 #6

Feb 12, 2014

It's simple: if you're a KICK-ASS fan, you need to read this issue. Because if you're a fan of the franchise, odds are you're a fan of Hit-Girl, and this is a huge issue for her. We've come to know her as a shockingly badass kid, but Millar dedicates this issue to giving us a whole new look at the character and it's one that definitely makes her story even more interesting. Now it's time to see how Millar plans to wrap this all up. Bring on the penultimate issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Kick-Ass 3 #7

Apr 9, 2014

The end is nigh, and Millar's making damn sure you're aware of it. This penultimate issue races towards the series' conclusion and does a more than ample job building the hype for the big finale. He lays it on a bit too thick with some of the dialogue towards the end, but despite that, this issue is certain to leave any KICK-ASS fan anxious to see how it'll all come to a close. Personally, I'm stoked to see what he'll deliver in this big finish. It's definitely looking like it'll be action-packed, but hopefully it's crammed with some gripping displays of emotion as well. How funny would it be if Milllar's been trolling us this entire time and both main characters live?

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Larfleeze #3

Aug 28, 2013

LARFLEEZE is all kinds of erratic and nutty, and you know what? I absolutely adore it. The New 52 is filled with so much gloom and doom, so it's nice to have a cosmic title which offers an overdose of wackiness, big laughs and legitimate excitement. The visuals compliment the atmosphere quite well, the writing is sharp and the narrative is a thoroughly fun ride. This has without question become one of my favorite DC titles and it's a real joy to read. You've earned a chuckle or two, so do yourself a favor and give this issue a shot.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Larfleeze #4

Oct 23, 2013

The amount of enjoyment packed into LARFLEEZE #4 is just absurd. Just like the previous issues, the writing is consistently superb, overflowing with creativity and loaded with wit. Everything the two writers put on the page, Kolins and Atiyeh bring to life in such a fantastic fashion. The cosmic slugfest is a real joy and the book ends on a note that makes me more than anxious to spend $2.99 on the next one. This is without question the most enthralling book from the New 52 for me. It's not often I love a cosmic book, but I absolutely love me some LARFLEEZE.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #5

Nov 27, 2013

I've said it once and I'll say it again: LARFLEEZE is without question one of DC's most fun and entertaining books. The script is exceptionally witty and, even when it feels a tad slow, it's still a completely engrossing read. You'd think Larfleeze's personality would get kind of tiring by now, but it hasn't at all. In fact, the character continues to grow on me with every single issue and month after month this title impresses me. They're doing great work with the Orange Lantern and I just can't recommend it enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Larfleeze #7

Jan 29, 2014

LARFLEEZE is still well-written and looks wonderful, but focusing on the cast from the other dimension is an abrupt shift and ultimately, leaves the main character feeling somewhat in the dust. Sure, Larfleeze technically has a more than fair amount of panel space in this one, but instead of moving the character forward, we only see him being selfish and powerful yet again. It's by no means a bad issue and I most certainly still love this series as a whole, but after so many interesting developments, this one felt like a little bit like a step backwards.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Larfleeze #9

Mar 26, 2014

LARFLEEZE #9 is a fun time and makes a promising development for the next issue. However, it has a "been there, seen that" feeling to it. The laughs are still present and the action is still explosive, but neither feels quite up to par with what we've already seen from the series. Despite feeling like it doesn't bring anything new to the table (until towards the end of the comic, that is), it's still an enjoyable issue and I continue to love the visuals. It's just too bad this series is coming to an end with issue #12, but I suppose we'll just have the enjoy the ride while it lasts!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Larfleeze #11

May 28, 2014

The penultimate chapter of LARFLEEZE has its moments, but overall, it has me feeling down the middle. The action is enjoyable, the banter offers some smiles, and the artwork is praiseworthy. It's just too bad a heavy amount of exposition really adds up and detracts from the issue. New readers will obviously appreciate all of recap information that's sprinkled throughout the chapter, but seeing as this is the second to last issue, I'm guessing there won't be too many of those. Meanwhile, the rest of us will be left with a noticeable sense of familiarity as all of these events are explained to us yet again. Here's hoping the title ends on a strong note!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #12

Jun 25, 2014

LARFLEEZE leaves this world the same way it in came into it: full of massive action, exciting visuals, and thoroughly entertaining banter. It really is a shame this book is over. There's so many dark and serious stories out there, but you could often count on this one to hit you with an enjoyable dose of silliness and fun. To make its departure even more painful, it ends on a note that has so much potential for absurd comedy! Oh well, at least it was a good ride while it lasted, right?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Marvel Knights Spider-Man (2013) #4

Jan 8, 2014

If you've been liking this series, you'll be happy to know Kindt and Rudy basically hit us with more of the same. Spider-Man's placed in a new environment, a bunch of foes enter the picture and there's all kinds of craziness until we're hit with a cliffhanger that'll open up the next (and final!) chapter. This one isn't quite as exciting as what we've seen before, but it's still a fine amount of wacky fun and, even though it's a bit too inconsistent at times, Rudy serves up some legitimately engrossing visuals yet again. Now we just have to wait and see how it'll all end...

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Marvel Knights Spider-Man (2013) #5

Feb 5, 2014

MARVEL KNIGHTS: SPIDER-MAN ends on a note that's still all about the crazy gauntlet of brawls, but shifts gears a bit so Kindt can deliver an important and positive message. It's a tad heavy-handed, but it's still very effective. Then there's Marco Rudy who goes above and beyond with the visuals in this one. If you thought the previous issues were trippy, just wait until you set your eyes on this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Marvel Knights: Hulk #1

Dec 11, 2013

The plot is still pretty light on details, but for the most part, that's alright since this is an opening chapter and it does just enough to sink a strong hook into us. I'll definitely stick around for the second issue and that's all thanks to solid writing, a staggering second half and impressive work on the environments. If this is what the book has to offer without Hulk, I can only imagine how crazy it'll get if the Green Goliath does finally appear.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Marvel Knights: Hulk #2

Jan 15, 2014

MARVEL KNIGHTS: HULK has some engrossing artwork, but the lack of focus on the title character is definitely a bit of a bummer. Instead, a new organization has become the center of attention and it feels like we're abruptly tossed right into the middle of things. It's strange but certainly fun at times. I'll definitely stick around to see how it plays out, but hopefully it won't just be Hulk smashing and then the group realizing he can't be controlled. Even if it is, at least we know it'll look solid!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Minimum Carnage: Omega #1

Nov 21, 2012

This was by no means a bad conclusion, but the build up and insane action over the past few issues had me expecting more from this final chapter. Everything comes to a clean conclusion and, despite not dropping any jaws, creates engaging action throughout.One thing I did like is that Carnage is now more dangerous than ever. Somehow, that psychotic murderer that took on Spider-Man and Venom back in the day was tame compared to the man (or should I just say symbiote) that he is now. Carnage now has the ability to unleash his true potential and there's a lot of room for this new and deadlier symbiote to appear down the road.In the end, this is an alright ending for a very entertaining event. The opening chapter didn't blow me away nor did the conclusion, but the core was tons of fun. If you missed out and you're a big symbiote fan, I'd definitely recommend checking it out when the TPB eventually hits.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Mortal Kombat X #6

Feb 10, 2015

MORTAL KOMBAT X is doing an awesome job getting me excited for the video game. This may not be the most exciting chapter yet, but it's a very important one if you're also anxiously awaiting the fighting game and want to learn more about its new cast. A majority of it is spent teaching us about who Kotal Kahn is and it really did give me a better emotional connection to the guy. I wasn't that interested in him before reading this, but now I'm left feeling very curious about what his future will be, both in the series and in the game. Thankfully, we're also treated to a cliffhanger that's pretty much guaranteed to get any Mortal Kombat fan to purchase the next chapter. Here's hoping the follow-up delivers and it's a jaw-dropping clash.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
New Avengers (2010) #34

Nov 28, 2012

For me, this is a very mixed ending. The conclusion makes it seem as though there's more to come from the team (Cages aside, of course), but I guess they'll go their separate ways (for the most part) because the next NA title is essentially the next Illuminati book and only has a few members of the roster... not to mention it takes place all the way over in Wakanda.While this issue is action packed and Deodato's art rocks, the guest artists hinder the overall impact and the dialogue is just alright. There's a nice splash page that attempts to give you a heavy trip down nostalgia lane, but when all is said and done, I'm way more excited to see what Hickman does with the series in Marvel NOW! and can't say I'm all that sad to see this one go. It's certainly not a bad ending, but it wasn't as powerful as I felt it should be and passed by at an average level. That said, I do highly recommend this if you're a Doctor Strange fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
New Avengers (2013) Annual #1

Jun 25, 2014

NEW AVENGERS ANNUAL #1 costs $4.99 and it's well worth every single penny. And the best part of it all? It's 100% new reader friendly. You can go into this issue with absolutely zero knowledge of the current NEW AVENGERS volume or Doctor Strange and you'll never feel left in the dark. It's a great spotlight on the mystical character and it has legitimately phenomenal artwork on each and every page. Seriously, you don't need to be a fan of Stephen Strange to fall in love with this issue

View Issue       View Full Review
8
New Suicide Squad #1

Jul 9, 2014

NEW SUICIDE SQUAD #1 seems to focus on style over substance. The issue aims to entertain as thew new team is tossed into a fairly topical scenario and we're told to just sit back and watch all of the madness unfold. It's a good looking ride and it certainly is a fun one, too. That said, there's a handful of promising elements that are swiftly touched upon in this issue. The basics of several conflicts have been teased and there's a lot of promise with the two that are running the show. Watching these villains travel the globe and cause chaos is good fun, but this roster has so much potential for character-driven stories and you can see a glimpse of that direction in this first chapter. Now it's just a matter of seeing how it'll all be handled. Crazy action is always a blast, but focusing on the relationships between these characters could transform this book into something exceptional. Here's hoping we begin to see more of that in the next issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
New Suicide Squad #2

Aug 13, 2014

Overall, there isn't much substance here -- at least not yet -- but despite that, it's still a lot of fun. If you simply want to see these characters constantly running, narrowly escaping explosions, and humiliating goons, you'll get what you're looking for. It's essentially what you'd expect from a blockbuster movie: non-stop spectacle that isn't very challenging and a ton of fun. Hopefully the creative team is just giving this book and explosive start and has more elaborate plans as the story progresses! This dose of crazy action is fun right now, but eventually, they'll need to focus on the characters and not just how they act in a fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
New Suicide Squad #3

Oct 8, 2014

"It's okay" really is the easiest way to describe my feelings about NEW SUICIDE SQUAD #3. The overall narrative isn't doing much to win me over and what should be the most exciting bit is ruined by some stiff and seemingly rushed artwork, but I'm still interested enough to see what'll develop with several of the villains and the writing with Quinn was certainly enjoyable. There isn't a lot of substance here and I'll give this one just a few more chapters to pick up the pace and dish out bigger developments, but the ending most definitely has potential and the conclusion with Quinn was solid.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
New Suicide Squad #7

Feb 11, 2015

Everything in me wants to love this title, but fluctuating artwork and a story that's more focused on mayhem than character often leaves me feeling like the issue was just okay. Don't get me wrong, I love a good dose of crazy action, but it reaches a point where we need a reminder of why we're interested in these characters. Thankfully, we do get a small sample of that here with Black Manta and it's greatly appreciated (better late than never!). NEW SUICIDE SQUAD is a pretty fun series, but it constantly leaves me feeling like it could accomplish more than just big action.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
New Suicide Squad #8

Mar 11, 2015

Everything in me wants to love this comic. I love the premise behind the team, I like the cast of characters, and I most definitely like seeing them get throw into all kinds of chaos. It has the potential to be smart, exciting, and even funny. However, noticeably inconsistent and stiff artwork and a mostly uneventful issue leaves me feeling pretty disappointed. There are times when the comic is obviously trying to offer something more compelling -- an effort I absolutely appreciate -- but it doesn't really deliver and unfortunately, it feels like some of the pages could have been used in better ways.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
New Suicide Squad: Futures End #1

Sep 10, 2014

Aside from some of the visuals, nothing really won me over or made me feel like this is something that should be read even though it's essentially a one-shot. I was torn between 2 and 3-stars, but seeing as my reactions on this issue are mostly negative, I have to side with the lower score. Maybe some of you will think the changes are a twisted delight and you'll have a blast with the short adventure. Unfortunately, that wasn't the case for me.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
New Warriors (2014) #7

Jul 2, 2014

NEW WARRIORS #7 definitely isn't the strongest chapter in this series, but that's because it feels like it's focused on taking steps to establish the latest plot instead of letting these enjoyable personalities shine. This means it's not as funny or as exciting as the other chapters, but it still hits you with just enough action and sharp lines to make sure you're engaged when the next bit of buildup comes around. Also, the visuals aren't bad, but if you've been following the series, you may feel like there's a bit of a tonal shift. This is pretty odd since the artist and colorist have worked on this book, but never together. In the end, NEW WARRIORS #7 is an okay issue. It takes a number of mandatory steps to generate hype for the narrative and offer a small sample of its signature charm. On the plus side, it ends on a note that promises an increased amount of fun in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Night of the Living Deadpool #1

Jan 15, 2014

THE WALKING DEADPOOL NIGHT OF THE LIVING DEADPOOL is off to a great start. The clever coloring is very enjoyable and compliments the tone of the book extremely well. Despite a bit of exposition, Bunn gets things moving quickly and we're hit with some awesome action and two plot points that leave us with quite a few questions. Now I'm legitimately curious to see where this book will take us next. My fellow Deadpool fans, do yourself a favor and check this one out.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Night of the Living Deadpool #2

Jan 29, 2014

This issue makes it crystal clear this limited-series is going for pure madness and fun. There's definitely some strong character moments for Deadpool and there's certain to be more down the road, but it's obvious Bunn is going for a series that'll make us chuckle and gasp at violence. And I must say, he and Rosanas are most definitely succeeding so far. I really enjoyed the premiere issue, but the high amount of quality comedy and a solid character moment made me fall in love with this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Night of the Living Deadpool #3

Feb 19, 2014

NIGHT OF THE LIVING DEADPOOL is a real blast. Okay, maybe that's not the best word to use considering the darker tone of this issue, but it's a legitimately fantastic experience if you're a fan of either Deadpool or zombie stories. And if you happen to love both, then it's safe to say you'll share my enthusiasm for this limited-series. Bunn is really bringing his A game with this series. Each issue hits us with a completely new atmosphere and he has apparently planted the seeds for a very promising plot point in the finale. Bunn's managed to juggle a story that's funny, gruesome, and surprisingly emotional. Throw in Rosanas' brilliant artwork and you've got a fantastic limited-series. Now it's time to see how Bunn plans to wrap it all up.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Night of the Living Deadpool #4

Mar 5, 2014

Deadpool and zombies, what's not to love? Cullen Bunn managed to take the best elements from both of their worlds and mesh them together. The limited series is loaded with humor yet also avoids making Deadpool a walking and talking punch line. It's not all fun and games with the Merc with a Mouth in this one and it's great to see him receive a little more emotion. Then there's all of the gore, horror and depressing elements you'd find in any standard zombie apocalypse. Ramon Rosanas then masterfully brings this all to life and, simply put, the end result is something any zombie or Deadpool fan needs to experience. I wasn't sure what to expect with this final chapter -- especially since we've seen the book undergo such drastic changes in tone -- but I've got to say, this finale did not disappoint one bit.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Ninjak (2015) #1

Mar 11, 2015

Many of us have waited months -- some even years -- for a Ninjak series and Valiant made sure it was absolutely worth the wait. Smart, exciting and full of jaw-dropping visuals, NINJAK needs to be on your pull list. It does such an excellent job teasing all this series has to offer. It offers the badass action you'd expect, yet it's so much more than just slick fighting. There's a strong script here, the promise of so much character development, and a legitimate interesting story unfolding. It sprinkles in just the right amount of humor, too. But hey, is anyone honestly surprised that Valiant has created yet another awesome series? Probably not. You've waited for a NINJAK solo series and Valiant's giving you the one you deserve. Go get it. Now comes the tough part: waiting for the second issue. Good thing Valiant always releases extensive previews, right?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nova (2013) #16

Apr 16, 2014

NOVA's a really fun book. Sam Alexander's a relatable and likable lead, Duggan's an exceptional comedic writer and keeps the book pleasant, and Baldeon's visuals -- along with Sotocolor's colors -- are a great fit for the title's atmosphere and produce a few legitimately beautiful panels of the universe. I may not be the biggest fan of Marvel's cosmic universe, but a book this enjoyable is pretty tough to resist.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Predator: Fire And Stone #3

Dec 17, 2014

PREDATOR: FIRE AND STONE #3 provides an entertaining insight into Galgo's personality before dropping a cliffhanger that is 100% guaranteed to make fans go crazy with excitement. It's exactly what we've been waiting for and the art team did a solid job teasing the conflict. Now we just have to wait and see how it all goes down. Hopefully this final chapter will show us why Ahab should go down as one of the unforgettable Predators. Considering he's stuck to a guy who will do anything to live and can't be trusted -- a point this issue will fully make you understand -- that should make the upcoming battle very interesting. We're rooting for you, Ahab.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Prometheus: Fire and Stone #1

Sep 10, 2014

If you like the Alien/Prometheus mythos, odds are this first chapter will hold onto your curiosity and leave you very thrilled to see what the next chapter will offer. We've met the characters, been told the basics, and experienced the right dose of buildup, so now it's time to see if the payoff will be worth the wait. Based on the handling of the tone in this chapter, I'm feeling pretty optimistic about where this series will go next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Prometheus: Fire and Stone #2

Oct 15, 2014

PROMETHEUS: FIRE AND STONE #2 feels like a proper return to LV-223. The visuals do a killer job with the atmosphere and the aliens as we continue to explore the moon and see how much it has changed since the movie. It's full of gripping encounters, reminders of why so many people had nightmares after seeing the alien movies, and there's plenty of intrigue being sprinkled into the story. This is finally starting to feel like a crossover instead of just different stories which happen to take place in the same area.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Prometheus: Fire and Stone #3

Nov 12, 2014

PROMETHEUS: FIRE AND STONE #3 is the limited series' penultimate issue and it does one hell of a good job boosting my interest in the finale. There's such a good blend of character, horror, legitimate intrigue and excellent visuals in this one. It may not be as action-packed as some would hope, but it's loaded with tension as it makes some pretty big developments and leaves us with a pretty frightening final panel. Overall, I've been enjoying the Fire and Stone chapters a good deal, but I really loved this one. I'm looking froward to the final chapter and I hope Tobin has enough room to wrap up all of these arcs while also giving nods to the other Fire and Stone titles.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punisher (2014) #3

Mar 5, 2014

Edmondson and Gerads continue to prove they're an appropriate fit for the character. Castle's blunt and vicious mission remains firmly in place, yet a likable supporting cast and some legitimate charm gives the volume a nice sense of balance. There's plenty that'll appeal to longtime fans of the character and just enough established to help make it a refreshing and appealing experience to those who think the anti-hero is too one-dimensional. There's a whole lot of potential in this volume and watching it all unfold is plenty of fun. Welcome back, Frank.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punisher (2014) #5

May 7, 2014

Edmondson and Gerads simply get the Punisher and continue to give us what we want to see. Sure, the story is moving a little slower than expected and a lot has yet to be answered or expanded upon, but they're producing a creative look at the way Frank Castle operates. The artwork is cleverly executed and, while it does move a few plot pieces forward, this latest issue basically exists to help us admire just how good Castle is at what he does. THE PUNISHER takes what we've come to expect from Frank and does it quite well. We've yet to really build a strong emotional connection to the supporting cast or get some of the finer details behind the villainous plot, but you know what? It's still a totally entertaining issue and oozes such a cool atmosphere. To top it off, the final page is guaranteed to make you pick up the next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punisher (2014) #6

Jun 4, 2014

Edmondson and Gerads continue to make this book a thrill ride. This is bad news for Frank Castle, but great news for us readers. The pacing is incredibly fast and there's so many awesomely crafted action scenes for us to enjoy. It's an attention-grabbing story that'll keep your eyes glued to the pages. The plot may not be all that elaborate just yet, but it sure is a rush. Gerads then does a stellar job bringing the Punisher's mission to life and successfully pulls you into all of the craziness. Because it jumps from one exhilarating scene to the next, the issue feels like a quick read and, before you know it, you'll be left wondering where they'll go next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punisher (2014) #8

Jul 2, 2014

This issue basically focuses on Punisher doing what he does best. He's facing an uphill struggle, yet he's still finding ways to systemically take down the bad guys. This isn't just Frank running through the jungle like a mad man and blasting everyone in his way, though. He's in poor condition and the creative team focuses on his intellect and tactics as a soldier. It's not bringing anything drastically new to the table, it's just a slightly different approach to what we usually see him do and the visual team presents it well. After having such an action-packed issue, the conclusion seems a little abrupt, but it's still a gripping ride and I'm excited to see where this book will go next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punisher (2014) #10

Sep 3, 2014

Immediately after finishing this chapter, I thought of Rorschach's great line. "I'm not locked in here with you... you're locked in here with me!" Having such a brutal anti-hero locked in prison with a whole bunch of scummy characters is loaded with potential and it's off to a really good start. The focus on Castle's time in prison is a total thrill and I'm legitimately curious to see how things will play out over in Los Angeles. Now it's just a matter of seeing how these plot points will intersect. Thanks to Edmondson's sharp writing and Gerads' expressive artwork, THE PUNISHER #10 is definitely worth picking up. And yes, it can technically serve as a jumping-on spot!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punisher (2014) #11

Oct 8, 2014

THE PUNISHER #11 is plot-heavy and never lost sight of my attention. This story arc has so many pieces in motion, but it doesn't feel convoluted at all. It keeps a firm focus on giving us more insight into Frank Castle while successfully balancing interesting developments with the supporting characters and villains. New readers may feel a tad lost, but the way it's written gives you everything you really need to know. For example, you'll have no idea who the cameo is, but you'll understand the relationship the character has with Frank. Edmondson and Gerads may not be doing anything drastically new with the character, but what they are doing is gripping and incredibly entertaining.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Punisher (2014) #14

Jan 7, 2015

THE PUNISHER #14 is fast-paced, tense, and presented in a very imaginative way. Even when characters take a break from shooting so they can use their words, you can feel everyone is on edge and something can go wrong at a moment's notice. While there is plenty of enjoyable madness (Frank sure does love blowing up enemies) and the visuals make it a great ride, the chapter also manages to give you a little more insight into the anti-hero and drops some pretty big developments. I can wait to read the next chapter, but considering how good this one is, I'd really prefer not to. This creative team simply understands the Punisher and it really shows.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punisher (2014) #16

Mar 18, 2015

Nathan Edmondson and Mitch Geards' THE PUNISHER continues to be a smart, gripping, and awesomely illustrated story. This chapter was pretty much all about explaining what's going on and why, so it may not be all that exciting, but it's getting important information out there and ends on a note that pretty much guarantees everyone will want to pick up the next issue. Man, now I'm left wondering what House of Cards would be like if Frank Castle was part of the story. Frank Castle vs. Frank Underwood? Place your bets!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Punisher: Nightmare #1

Jan 2, 2013

Simply put, PUNISHER: NIGHTMARE #1 looks excellent and is a very solid start to a hopefully superb story. The art almost perfectly conveys Punisher's dark and gritty world and the script kept my eyes glued to the captions. Ialsolove the way it's paced, diving back and forth between Castle's investigation and learning about the Central Park victim, Jake Niman.Right now, this book comes as a double-edged sword. It's off to a great start, but it's somewhat depressing to know it has an expiration date. I just hope the next 4 issues lure me in as much as this one did.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punisher: Nightmare #5

Jan 30, 2013

This is a series that looks top-notch but is weighed down by an excessive amount of captions and dialogue -- which is funny because there's even a moment where Frank says Johnny chats too much. Despite this complaint, this was a solid final issue. The extended fight sequence is harsh and violent, but oddly enough, the issue ends on a note that made me smirk. This is certainly worth a read if you're a fan of The Punisher.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Punisher: War Zone (2012) #5

Feb 27, 2013

This issue comes as a double-edged sword. On one end, it's a stellar conclusion to Rucka's run with Frank and a wonderful way to end the story. On the other end, it's the end of Rucka's run and that's something to be sad about! It certainly ends on a very interesting note and I'm very anxious to see if Marvel is crafting a follow-up to this conclusion. He's leaving the character(s) with a lot of potential and I would love to see the story continue. Regardless, this is definitely a must read for any Punisher fan out there.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Quantum and Woody #5

Nov 6, 2013

This book is yet another example of how Valiant has something for everyone. Character-driven? HARBINGER. Horror? SHADOWMAN. Action? BLOODSHOT. Unlimited laughs and fun? Well, you'll want to check out this issue of QUANTUM & WOODY. Seriously, you've earned a good time, so go buy this book and enjoy some much deserved levity.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rai #3

Jul 9, 2014

Valiant has published some great comics and RAI is no exception. Kindt's doing an impressive job handling a massive amount of worldbuilding. This futuristic version of Japan clearly borrows elements from other memorable sci-fi tales (e.g. Blade Runner), but it's doing more than enough to standout and it's always fascinating to see more and more of this new environment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rai #4

Aug 27, 2014

Rai, your big, beautiful, and complex world continues to expand and I'm enjoying every second of it. A lot of the story has been building several mysteries -- who Rai really is, whether Father's real, what went down with Japan's first murder -- and RAI #4 is all about rewarding readers with some very exciting answers and then leaves us on a cliffhanger that'll probably make some exclaim "oh, snap!" Honestly, because the book has such a detailed opening page, you can treat this one as a jumping on spot and odds are you'll be hooked when you finish the chapter. Obviously, I recommend picking up all of the issues, but some of you are working with a tight budget and $3.99 per issue isn't an easy thing to make room for. So, if this book has piqued your interest (magnificent artwork, worldbuilding that takes notes from Blade Runner, and a lead who's still discovering who and what he is), I'd say give this one a shot and prepare to become invested in Rai's story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rai #5

Dec 3, 2014

Rai's back with bit of a slow start. You won't see Crain unleashing any jaw-droppingly gorgeous action sequences here, but that doesn't stop it from being a very good read! With this issue, Kindt's pretty much covering all of the ground he needs to as he teaches new readers about this elaborate and fascinating world and its cast of characters while also setting up several key plot points. If you've been loving RAI -- and that should apply to, well, everyone -- you'll likely think this is a solid return and anxiously await the next issue. It's a bit bummer there weren't any really mind-blowing or gripping developments, but it's done a fine job setting the stage for what's to come and, given how good this book has been, I'm thoroughly excited to read RAI #6.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws #14

Nov 21, 2012

While it's not anything exceptional, RED HOOD AND THE OUTLAWS is far from bad. I'd say it manages to land somewhere in the middle and thankfully has some great art to compliment it.There's so much possibility when it comes to Joker's diabolical plans for the second Robin, especially after the twist in the zero issue. I hope Lobdell steps up to the plate and knocks this one out of the park because this story has the potential to be an emotional masterpiece if handled properly. I can't help but wonder if we'll see Arsenal and Starfire as Red Hood battles the Clown Prince of Crime over in Gotham City, though. Honestly, I'd be perfectly fine with the duo taking a backseat as the tie-in focuses solely on Todd's struggle with the Bat-villain because it definitely has the ability to fill that much space.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Red Hood And The Outlaws #16

Jan 23, 2013

When it comes to 'Death of the Family' tie-ins, I was really anxious to see how things would go down over in this title. It goes without saying that Todd and Joker have quite a history (especially with these huge New 52 changes), so I was really hoping this story would pack a heavy emotional punch. Instead, it's looking like a chance for Lobdell to combine his books and have fun with having his characters interacting. Was this a terrible issue? No, and I'm sure plenty of you out there will enjoy it, but to me it just felt too generic and was a disappointing tie-in issue to Snyder/Capullo's great story. I'll absolutely stick around until the end, but I really, really hope there's a greater sense of danger or urgency next time.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Red Hood And The Outlaws #18

Mar 20, 2013

This story is without question mandatory reading for any Jason Todd fan. Gripping, powerful and visually stunning, Scott Lobdell is leaving the series with one helluva swan song. It doesn't deliver the same amount of feels as the absurdly good BATMAN & ROBIN #18, but it's still an incredibly solid story that'll tug at your heart before all is said and done. Now, it's time to see what James T Tynion IV will do with the trio.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Hood And The Outlaws #19

Apr 17, 2013

I know opinions are going to be extremely divided on the twist here, but I'm holding off on any kind of strong reaction until we get more details in the next issue. For all we know, a reversal option could be revealed in the next chapter and that's what Roy and Starfire will pursue. However, one great thing about this is it gives what could essentially be a fresh start for the character. Considering his rocky history in the New 52, that could absolutely be a good thing if handled well and a solid way for fans to no longer argue over his altered origin. Only time will tell what direction this will go, but for now, you have my curiosity, Tynion IV.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws #20

May 15, 2013

I'm very curious to see where Tynion will go from here. While the action-packed plot has me stoked (can we please see the return of Drakon?), I'm even more interested to see how he'll handle Todd's future. Like I said above, it's implied this memory-wipe can be reversed, but there's no guarantee he was being honest or that Todd will indeed change his mind. As someone who feels like Scott Lobdell overcomplicated Todd's origin with new elements (his elaborate training, Joker's connection to everything), my interest is certainly piqued. With these dark elements allegedly erased, will we see him become a hero with morals similar to Nightwing instead of an anti-hero? We've already had a small taste of Todd being quite optimistic in this issue, so I'm anxious to see how that will unfold as he's tested in more dire situations and what this could mean for his relationship for the rest of the Bat-family.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Hood And The Outlaws #21

Jun 19, 2013

Tynion does a fine job giving Roy a relatable voice and the issue moves at a thoroughly entertaining pace. He's now moving all of the mystical and deadly pieces into place and establishing the basics --why there's a hit on their heads, who the two key sides are and what they allegedly want. The momentum is growing and finally, I'm legitimately excited for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws #22

Jul 24, 2013

Though honestly, it does kind of look like Roy just time traveled here from the '90s with that amount of gear on him.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws Annual #1

May 29, 2013

Honestly, I'm straight down the middle on this one. While the art impresses at times, Roy's inventions deliver laughs and Cheshire's involvement is a blast, I thought the focus on important dramatic elements in the book weren't especially moving and, if anything, mainly served as build-up for the bigger picture ahead. Developments are certainly made, but nothing surrounding them was particularly enthralling for me.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Red Lanterns #13

Oct 24, 2012

I want to like RED LANTERNS. Really, I swear I do. I love Atrocitus and I think his corps has potential for so many great stories. It's just too bad this isn't one of them. The issue looks good and has some harsh action, but it's weighed down by cheesy dialogue and a plot that doesn't feel especially inspired. It's an okay issue, but I can't really recommend it unless you're a completionist with the urge to collect everything related to Rise of the Third Army. Here's hoping the next issue is better!

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Red Lanterns #16

Jan 30, 2013

Let me get this straight... we don't even get to see the most gripping part in the next issue? The story with the Manhunter's assaulting Oa continues over in GREEN LANTERN CORPS ANNUAL #1? Well, there goes my strongest motivation to continue with this one.If you think the series has been alright so far, odds are your feelings will remain the same for this latest issue. That said, it's just too bad the change in art takes away this book's strongest advantage. But, if you're waiting for the series to improve before jumping back on, then you'll have to keep waiting.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Lanterns #18

Mar 27, 2013

I sincerely think DC came up with the idea of "WTF certified" after reading this cliffhanger. It's not the kind of twist that'll make you thrilled for the next issue. Instead, it'll make you scratch your head and possibly say out loud to yourself, "wait, what?" Have fun trying to accurately guess the reasoning behind this one!At this point it's pretty much business as usual with this book. It looks great and, while the story isn't going to blow you away, it's certainly not terrible. If you've been enjoying the book thus far or want an Atrocitus focused story, odds are you'll have a decent time with this one... even if the ending is apparently all kinds of crazy.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Lanterns #20

May 22, 2013

Peter Milligan's final issue basically feels like he wanted to leave a clean slate for upcoming series writer Charles Soule. New character created in the series aside (Rankorr), I have a strong feeling you could go into issue #21 without having read a single issue of Milligan's run, and odds are it'll serve as a great jumping on point. If you're super passionate about Atrocitus, then yes, you should read this just to have all of the facts on the character. But for everyone else who has felt letdown with this series, I'd say you can definitely skip on this and then give the new creative team an honest chance. If I could give half stars, this would be a 2.5. But, seeing as I can't, I think the solid art warrants a boost to 3.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Return of the Living Deadpool #1

Feb 4, 2015

If you loved NIGHT OF THE LIVING DEADPOOL -- and that should be many of you -- then this should be an obvious purchase. It may be a different artist this time around, but Virella's style is an excellent fit for this dark and funny world. We haven't seen quite the same blend of horror, drama and comedy just yet, but it's still a thoroughly entertaining intro which gets all of the necessary information out there while also offering a few laughs and some zombie killing fun. I recommend reading NIGHT OF THE LIVING DEADPOOL first, but if you don't have the extra cash or time to do so, it's worth noting this technically is new reader friendly and absolutely worthy of your attention if you like Wade Wilson or the zombie genre. It looks like Bunn is about to give us another great Deadpool limited series. Remember when Deadpool had a lot of titles and only a few of them were just okay? It's looking like those days are thankfully behind us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Return of the Living Deadpool #2

Mar 4, 2015

RETURN OF THE LIVING DEADPOOL #2 offers exactly what you'd expect from it: a lot of comedy, a good amount of horror, just enough stabbing and shooting, and little serving of heart. Virella's doing a great job putting Bunn's script into the panels and, thanks to some twisted developments in the story, the artist has the chance to create some really messed up visuals in this one. All in all, RETURN OF THE LIVING DEADPOOL continues to be a really entertaining story that offers some big twists in the near future. It hasn't impressed me as much as the first volume did, but the potential is definitely there and it's good fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Robin Rises: Alpha #1

Dec 24, 2014

Robin Rises started as an action-packed story that's full of over-the-top and crazy fun. Since then, it has pretty much been non-stop popcorn entertainment and refused to slow down. To no one's surprise, that's also how it ends! It's a bummer so many pages were spent on recap (one detailed intro page would have been great!), but this is still a ton of entertainment and sure to feel like pure fan service for longtime readers of BATMAN AND ROBIN. Robin Rises really is the kind of story that needs to be turned into an animated movie. It's ridiculously fun and has just the right amount of character. Damian's return was a blast and I'm so excited to see what Tomasi will hit us with next in the pages of BATMAN AND ROBIN.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Robocop (2014) #2

Aug 6, 2014

If you want a true dose of RoboCop goodness, BOOM! Studios' new volume is what you need to check out. This second issue offers a commendable dose of buildup as we get a better look at the villain's plans and still chime in on our two leads. The visuals continue to feel like a perfect fit for this bleak city and, as expected, there's some exhilarating action thrown in the mix, too. All in all, I can't recommend this enough to fans of the first RoboCop movie. It feels like an organic continuation of the classic movie and is swiftly establishing a premise that has a lot of potential to give us a better look at RoboCop's limits.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Robocop (2014) #3

Sep 3, 2014

This latest chapter feels slightly weaker than the previous two, but, as a fan of the franchise and what BOOM! Studios is doing with this character so far, it still had me totally immersed in this gritty story and left me feeling very optimistic about what's to come. This one doesn't have big action or a significant focus on character, but it gets all of the pieces moving forward and builds plenty of potential. Now that Killian's plan is moving full speed ahead, we can hopefully get a stronger focus on character and excitement in the next issue. Still, this RoboCop fan is very pleased.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Robocop (2014) #5

Nov 5, 2014

If you felt like the new RoboCop movie was watered down or you just want to return to the original movie's universe, you need to be reading this book. Everything I loved about the original movie is here. It takes a good look at corruption and how few dare to stand against it, RoboCop's an awesome lead, and it feels every bit as over-the-top and brutal as the first movie. It's simple: If you like Paul Verhoeven's movie, you're going to be very, very happy with BOOM! Studios' series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Robocop (2014) #6

Dec 3, 2014

ROBOCOP is consistently good and always leaves me wanting to see more and more of Old Detroit. The people in there would love nothing more than to escape the depressing place, but BOOM! Studios is making it so I constantly want to visit this corrupt and twisted city. Yes, sometimes the artwork takes away from the experience, but aside from those few moments, this series has been consistently great and does the original movie justice. I especially love how Williamson is giving plenty of focus to other characters -- most notably Lewis and Killian -- without ever really neglecting RoboCop, the dude we're all here to see. Seriously, you need to give this series a chance if you like the classic movie. It's doing an awesome job continuing the franchise's story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Robocop (2014) #7

Jan 7, 2015

ROBOCOP #7 begins with pure fan service and then rushes towards yet another exciting and crazy conflict. It's not big on character but it has a ton of plot progression as we're thrown back into the ugliness and violence of the classic franchise's world. Before everything hits the fan, we get a totally cheerworthy scene of a newly upgraded RoboCop in action and it's awesomely over-the-top and thrilling. Seeing as much of this chapter is building towards another big conflict (don't worry, the cliffhanger delivers), this was a great and unforgettable way to open the issue before focusing purely on story. It's looking like the next issue will have even more craziness, too! You know they're handling the franchise with respect and when every issue makes me want to go re-watch the first movie.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Robocop (2014) #8

Feb 4, 2015

ROBOCOP #8 is all about big action, showing off the brutal villain, and teasing what's to come. It's fun, attention-grabbing, and the visuals consistently match the tone of Williamson's story. Now that we've enjoyed some over-the-top and ridiculously fun action, I'm looking forward to what appears to be a very character-driven next issue. What will RoboCop's immediate future have in store for him? How will Anne respond to the news? What will Killian do next? You can bet I want to find out and, seeing as this series has yet to disappoint me, I'm really anxious to see how all of the follow-up will be handled. Seriously, you need to be reading this if you like Paul Verhoeven's RoboCop.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Rumble #3

Feb 18, 2015

RUMBLE #3 takes a small break from moving the story forward so we can better understand and appreciate everything that's going on. I know we're only 3 issues in, but the first two have been loaded with worldbuilding and mysterious plot lines, so briefly taking a step back to give us all of the mandatory information was a necessary step. Thankfully, it didn't feel like hitting "pause" on the story and told us mostly everything we need to know in a fun, fascinating, and exciting way. It offers a ton of information but it doesn't feel like an info dump. There's a whole lot of imagination and just enough personality, humor and action thrown in there, too. So, let's get ready to read more RUMBLE. Sorry, couldn't resist that one. But seriously, this is a title that deserves your attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rumble #4

Mar 25, 2015

RUMBLE is without question one of the more entertaining stories around -- and yes, I say that as someone who isn't a big fan of the fantasy genre. The world continues to grow, the characters continue to amuse, and there's just enough action and comedy sprinkled into the more powerful moments. Thanks to consistently animated visuals and an immensely entertaining script, RUMBLE keeps winning me over and leaves me wanting more.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
S.H.O.O.T. First #1

Oct 16, 2013

It's a serviceable first issue, it's just a matter of whether you're looking for something new which deals with using technology to battle the supernatural. I imagine some of you who are particularly religious won't be too fond of the concept (though to be fair, it's unclear whether a deity does indeed exist at the moment), but for everyone else, I'd say give it a shot if the concept piques your curiosity.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Samurai Jack #2

Nov 20, 2013

Did you love the first issue? If so, it's safe to say you're going to love this one, too. Jim Zub fills the book with action and compliments the chaos with such playful dialogue -- it basically feels like a cartoon, and that's absolutely a good thing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #7

Apr 9, 2014

There's a consistently good-hearted atmosphere, a charismatic cast of characters, and legitimately fun (and funny) developments in SAMURAI JACK #7. I recommend giving this series a chance if you simply want to smile and have a nice dose of fun. That said, you will feel a bit lost if you jump on with this issue. So if you're going to dive in, be sure to pick up the last chapter, too. If I'm enjoying this series this much, I can only imagine how much die-hard fans of the show are digging it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #10

Jul 30, 2014

SAMURAI JACK #10 is a huge dose of fun. It hits us with a consistent flow of sharp and purposely over-the-top comedy that kept me smiling and occasionally bursting into laughter. It's a thoroughly satisfying read that keeps us entertained and having a total blast while also showing us make what it is that Jack so special (you know, besides for his skills with a sword!). The only complaint is it feels like a ridiculously quick read, but despite that, this is still still massively recommended to fans of the show.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Savage Wolverine #8

Sep 18, 2013

While Wolverine's story takes a very familiar path and Elektra doesn't get all that much focus, it's still a thoroughly entertaining finale and puts a surprisingly emotional spotlight on the Kingpin. The visuals may not be quite as crisp as the last issue, but Joe Madureira and Peter Steigerwald still create some astonishing visuals that are loaded with ferocity and make the read a real treat for your eyes. Complaints aside, this was still very satisfying and definitely an arc worth checking out if you're looking for a solid Wolverine or Kingpin story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Savage Wolverine #9

Oct 2, 2013

Intrigue, slashing and immersive art. Yeah, I definitely recommend picking this up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Savage Wolverine #10

Oct 23, 2013

The narrative isn't doing much to impress at the moment, but ultimately, Jock's artwork is what makes this issue shine and is so good that it easily warrants a bump to 4-stars. The weight of answering all of our questions is on the next issue's shoulders, so here's hoping it's delivered at a good pace instead of just dumping all of the details at once. Also, it wouldn't really be SAVAGE WOLVERINE without some kick-ass Wolverine action, so let's hope it delivers more on that end, too!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Savage Wolverine #12

Nov 27, 2013

Wolverine's new adventure isn't as thrilling as the one with Elektra or as visually stunning as Jock's, but it's attempting a more heartfelt approach to the book. It's always great to see a more humanizing take on James and the motivation here is certainly a great one, but despite that, it hasn't done too much to reel us in a good deal. However, there's enough established here to make me curious about how the next chapter will play out.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Scarlet Spider #10

Oct 10, 2012

The highly anticipated fight between Kaine and Venom is quite entertaining and overall the book is incredibly easy on the eyes. However, we're still widely left in the dark surrounding the plot (and characters) in the Microverse and there was a significant lack of Carnage in this chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Scarlet Spider #11

Nov 7, 2012

'Minimum Carnage' is swiftly turning out to be something truly special. The large creative team behind this event definitely deserves some praise. The characters are being written very well, the abstract world and use of the symbiotes looks solid, and the story -- based on recent events -- is indeed worthy of being its own mini-event. The issue ends on a note that's sure to keep a firm grip on your focus and I can't wait to read the next part. Bring on the symbiote army!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Scarlet Spider #12

Dec 12, 2012

This is the perfect jumping on point after the events of 'Minimum Carnage' and pretty much feels like Kaine 101. We get a detailed look at the anti-hero's supporting cast, a strong emphasis on who Kaine truly is, and of course, a funtastic action sequence. Who doesn't want to see Kaine take on robbers dressed as Santa? Come on!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Scarlet Spider #12.1

Dec 19, 2012

While this issue does retread a lot of Kaine's self-loathing (they won't love me if they know what I've done!), that's easily overlooked by the simple fact that this is an amazingly entertaining issue. There's a plethora of energetic and brutal action and the groundwork is established for what will hopefully transform into a great story. I'm loving SCARLET SPIDER more and more with every issue. Do yourself a favor and pick up this issue if you're even remotely curious about the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #13

Jan 9, 2013

I'm loving the extra focus on Aracely and Yost's latest story has a whole world of possibilities in store for us. While this issue didn't blow me away or anything, it was yet another very amusing and good looking entry in Kaine's series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #14

Feb 13, 2013

Yost delivers a solid script as he places a key focus on Kaine's moral struggle. The issue has a fantastic payoff that'll likely get you pumped for what's to come, but seemingly rushed art holds back the book's overall impact. Yost has done a great job creating a strong supporting cast for the anti-hero and I'm especially interested to see how things will go once he encounters them again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #15

Mar 27, 2013

My personal feelings about the upcoming elements aside, SCARLET SPIDER continues to consistently be one of Marvel's most entertaining books. Always packed with exciting action, an interesting supporting cast and a firm focus on Kaine's development, it's truly a surprise this book is only $2.99 in a world of $3.99 titles. The only thing really holding this issue down was some seemingly hurried artwork. Aside from that, it's yet another must read for any Kaine fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Scarlet Spider #16

Apr 24, 2013

Yost clearly has long time plans for Kaine and his friends, and I'm definitely stoked to see how he carries it all out. Some visual gripes aside, SCARLET SPIDER #16 rocks. It's sharp, wildly fun, laugh-inducing and serves as a huge tease for the major events that are sure to hit this book soon. If you haven't been following along, pick up this issue and hopefully I can welcome you to the Kaine fan club And, if you have been following along, this should be yet another obvious purchase for you and, as usual, it'll be well worth the cash.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Scarlet Spider #17

May 22, 2013

This is what SCARLET SPIDER is all about, friends. It's packed with brutal action, solid writing, terrific visuals and always manages to take a dark turn. I was really curious to see how Kaine's relationship would be handled, but in the meantime, I'm more than happy to have Yost put that on the back burner because this latest mission is pure bliss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #18

Jun 26, 2013

This issue's cover basically sums up what you can expect from it. It's Wolverine and Scarlet Spider side by side, looking awesome and being equally awesome. If that sounds like a good time to you, you're sure to have a blast. The art is topnotch, Yost's dialogue is as sharp as Wolverine's claws and the action is downright superb. SCARLET SPIDER once again manages to prove why it's one of the most gratifying books Marvel has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #19

Jul 24, 2013

All in all, this storyline has a somewhat abrupt conclusion but it does a thorough job moving Kaine forward and focusing on his future -- and if you read solicitations, you know there's A LOT to get excited about. SCARLET SPIDER is a book that regularly offers solid action with a sharp script and this issue is no exception. This continues to be one of my favorite Marvel titles and it definitely shouldn't be overlooked. Seriously, it's an insanely entertaining series that you should be reading.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #20

Aug 14, 2013

Stunning artwork and a strong serving of emotion helps SCARLET SPIDER #20 rise above the chunk of its fairly straightforward tale. It's absolutely an able jumping on point and wraps up with a whole lot of promise. Kaine continues to serve as a gripping lead and this is looking to be yet another adventure of his that I'll definitely follow. Lastly, if you've been wondering how Marvel plans on reintroducing a certain blue hoodie wearing individual, then you'll want to check this out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #21

Aug 28, 2013

If you've ever considered giving SCARLET SPIDER a chance, now is most definitely the time to do so (I couldn't bear to see this canceled after we've lost VENOM, dammit!). There's a more than adequate intro page which will bring you up to speed on what Kaine has been through and who the people in his life are. Once you're done with that, it's time for an action heavy issue which also lays the groundwork for some very troubling times ahead for Kaine. Seeing as Yost and Burnham have 3 issues to flesh this tale out, I have more than enough reason to believe this has the potential to be seriously grim and compelling stuff. Can we please have the next issue right now?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #22

Sep 25, 2013

Anyhow, regardless of how you feel about the chunk of this issue, the cliffhanger is sure to leave you quite anxious to pick up the next chapter. If Kraven's going to die (again), hopefully he goes out in one helluva fight!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #23

Oct 30, 2013

The best part about SCARLET SPIDER #23 is it gives us exactly what we want and still successfully throws a few greatly appreciated twists our way. Despite my personal gripes with it, the issue absolutely fulfills the last cliffhanger's promise of an epic brawl and, much to my surprise, is able to wrap up Kraven's involvement in a very pleasing manner while also teasing us with what's to come. It really is a shame this book's coming to an end so soon, because honestly, it's one of the most entertaining books Marvel has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #24

Nov 27, 2013

Yost and Burnham juggle a lot of material here yet still successfully provide a character-driven chapter and understandably so given what went down in "Into the Grave." We've seen Kaine walk the "I suck at being a hero" road plenty of times before, but given the sheer weight of everything surrounding him, it's a completely justified and well-executed path. The only thing really bringing this chapter down is a sometimes sketchier style which doesn't really fit all that well with the bold coloring -- it unfortunately comes off as rushed. It's too bad there's only one issue left in the series but here's hoping they'll make the best of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #25

Dec 18, 2013

All in all, SCARLET SPIDER leaves us the same way it came into this world: sharply written and full of eye-pleasing action. Except for Arcaley, the focus on Kaine's friends is mainly pushed aside to let Yost really dive into the clone's head and justify him finally accomplishing what he's apparently always wanted: a getaway to Mexico. It's terrible to see this book go (I sincerely hope Marvel releases an omnibus), but at least we know these two characters will remain in Yost's more than able hands as they switch to the upcoming team book NEW WARRIORS. You'll be missed, SCARLET SPIDER.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Avengers #33

Oct 24, 2012

Overall, "Rise of the Descendants" is off to a solid start. Remender is diving the team to establish two drastically different plots that are sure to take this story down an intriguing path. Minor complaints about the artwork aside, the sharp humor, vivid coloring, character development and brief action sequence definitely make this worth checking out. Also, this serves as a good jumping on point, so don't be afraid if you've missed out on the previous issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Avengers (2013) #1

Feb 13, 2013

Odds are you won't fall in love with Marvel's latest secret tale, but there's likely enough here to get hold of your curiosity. There's certainly a fair amount of potential -- the basics for this mystery have been set up and Spencer crafts some very enjoyable dialogue from Clint. The ongoing twist with their memory has a lot of promise, too. It goes without saying that I recommend giving this an honest chance if you happen to be a fan of the spy genre, S.H.I.E.L.D, Hawkeye or Black Widow. Plus, Taskmaster's in the next issue and that alone assures I'll pick it up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Avengers (2013) #2

Mar 13, 2013

Nick Spencer's SECRET AVENGERS is off to a very solid start. While I'm not the biggest fan of seeing a very different take on Taskmater, I'm just happy to see the character is getting some focus. He's bringing a more lighthearted tone to the table, and with the seemingly bleak things to come in this title, that can absolutely be a good thing. Also, with the way Spencer writers Clint Barton, I really, really, reaaaally hope there's some strong interactions between these two down the road. Give this book an honest shot and I think it'll definitely clench your attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Identities #2

Mar 18, 2015

SECRET IDENTITIES is a great way to escape the traditional superhero stories we tend to see. I'm left with literally no idea about what'll happen with each of them and I absolutely love that. It's not overly dark and gritty and it's not too focused on making you laugh. It strikes a nice balance as it offers totally different characters and all different kinds of tones.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Shadowman (2012) #0

May 1, 2013

Even if you haven't been following along in the series, this is an issue you can pick up and enjoy as a standalone. And if you're searching for a solid horror story, you should rush to your local shop right now. Engrossing, twisted and eerily gorgeous, this is an origin story that does Shadowman's villain total justice. It's a stellar story with equally impressive visuals and I absolutely recommend it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Shadowman (2012) #2

Dec 5, 2012

I don't know how they do it, but Valiant is producing some of the best books available right now. They don't have a single bad title. Maybe they made a deal with Mephisto?This book has a healthy serving of everything that makes comics awesome. It's violent, funny, crafts interesting characters, and has a plot that keeps a tight grip on your interest and refuses to let go. We're only on issue 2 here, so that means you've got plenty of time to jump on-board before you're left in the dust.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Shadowman (2012) #3

Jan 9, 2013

Stop it, Valiant. Just stop. My bank account is getting sick and tired of you making each $3.99 book a must buy. I don't even like the fantasy genre or most things magic related, so I was really hoping I could pass on SHADOWMAN -- but no, just like the other titles, it's exceptional. SHADOWMAN isn't a book crafted only for fans of the mystic arts and such -- it's made for anyone and everyone that wants to read a damn good story. The characters are varied and the development is solid, the art does an excellent job bringing the world to life and it's scattered with dialogue that'll put a smirk on your face. Well played, SHADOWMAN.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Shadowman (2012) #4

Feb 6, 2013

SHADOWMAN delivers on every level. There's quite literally no legitimate reason why you shouldn't at least give it an honest chance. The script is solid, thecharactersare diverse and engaging, the visuals are astonishingly detailed, and the book is just downright fun. In my opinion, it's every bit as good as Valiant's other titles -- and as you likely know by now, I think the other titles are top-notch. So, Valiant, when are you making a Jaunty plushie? It could possibly be the creepiest/most adorable thing ever!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Shadowman (2012) #5

Mar 6, 2013

SHADOWMAN is so good that it comes as no surprise a screenplay is being created for this franchise. I -- a guy who doesn't usually like fantasy or magic -- find myself fully engrossed with this story in every issue. Valiant's on a roll and Shadowman's adventure is quickly becoming one of my favorite titles from the awesome publisher.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Shadowman: End Times #1

Apr 30, 2014

When Valiant launches a premiere issue, expectations go up and understandably so. The publisher usually does an exceptional job grabbing my attention with its debut issues, but this one doesn't have quite the same amount of allure as the others do. Yes, it leaves me curious to see where it'll go next and it has mostly satisfying visuals, but heavy exposition and a slow set of developments prevent this one from truly pulling me into its fictional world. It's not a bad first chapter, but it doesn't pack the kind of punch we've come to expect from a first issue by Valiant, either.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Solar: Man of the Atom #1

Apr 16, 2014

If you're already familiar with Solar, this should be an obvious purchase for you. And if so, odds are the cliffhanger will do more than enough to assure you stick around for the second issue. However, I'm left feeling uncertain on where my fellow new readers will stand once they put the issue down. Barbiere's first issue does a fine job with the pacing and begins to slowly reveal the world we're stepping into. Furthermore, the character work in the issue is consistently solid and there's no denying how appealing Solar's powers are. However, seeing as this first issue is primarily build-up, it makes it somewhat difficult to feel truly invested in this new universe or very inspired to remove something else from the pull list to make room for this title. Personally, I'll give the series another issue or two so it can tell a little more of its story and offer a chance for me to feel more connected to the characters before I decide whether I'll stick around for the long haul.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Spread #2

Aug 6, 2014

SPREAD #2 offers more of what we saw in the first chapter: thrilling and violent action, a good look at this scary world and the monsters -- both human and other -- that inhabit it, and a decent amount of buildup with the protagonist and his goal. Right now, the villains don't feel like anything out of the ordinary and we haven't seen significant progress with the main narrative, but it's still a totally engrossing ride. SPREAD's blatantly inspired by several great franchises and even though it draws strong parallels to other stories, it's still able to feel like its own unique and warped tale. Fans of stories like The Last of Us or John Carpenter's The Thing, do yourself a favor and give this a read.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Spread #3

Sep 10, 2014

Justin Jordan and Kyle Strahm's SPREAD continues to be awesome and this is debatably the best chapter yet. While the other issues mostly thrived on violence, gore, and horror, this third chapter packs so much into it and it does so incredibly well. Don't worry, there's still some horrific and gory stuff to witness, but there's also a great focus on character, society as a whole, and even a good amount of levity thrown in there. SPREAD is crazy, post-apocalyptic horror done right and I can't get enough of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Spread #4

Nov 5, 2014

SPREAD #4 juggles a lot of things and never slows down the pace. There's terror, savage action, character development, and the world continues to grow. "I can't wait to read the next issue" is a saying that gets tossed around a lot, but that's how I honestly feel after every chapter of SPREAD. I want to see more of the frightening things this place has to offer and I really want to see how the "heroes" will overcome the twisted obstacles. Jordan and Strahm really are doing great things with this series and I'm hooked. They've not only created a seriously messed up and fascinating scenario, but they've also built characters that I want to learn about and root for. I've said it before and I'll say it again: You've got to read SPREAD if you're a horror fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Spread #5

Jan 21, 2015

I'm constantly wanting to see more and more of this twisted place and thankfully, the art team makes this setting and its characters every bit as tense and scary as it should be. Love horror or stories about surviving against impossible odds? Read SPREAD.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Spread #6

Mar 18, 2015

SPREAD continues to give us more bloody and oh-so-fun craziness and horror. The art team unleashes so many twisted and savage yet entertaining pages and Jordan makes sure the intensity never slows down. If you haven't checked this out yet but you love stories like John Carpenter's The Thing or The Last of Us, I strongly encourage you to pick up the first trade when it goes on sale. This first arc may not deliver any especially emotional or compelling moments, but it does an amazing job pulling you into this post-apocalyptic world and hits you with a non-stop flow of excitement and great-looking horror. Do yourself a favor and let SPREAD slither its way into your life. Okay, that was kind of lame, but I do mean it. Horror fans really need to give it an honest shot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2013) #3

Mar 13, 2013

While I wish we could see more of Darth Vader and Han in this issue, Brian Wood still manages to do a solid job juggling all of the cast and focusing on the key part of his tale (the search for the spy, of course). At the end of the day, this is something any and all Star Wars fans should check out. It looks great and plays out like a traditional Star Wars film. The flashback splash page is sure to hit you with a heavy dose of nostalgia and make you want to watch Episode 4 again, too. While this is the third chapter, it can still serve as a jumping on point for new readers as well. There's a thorough recap page as well, so don't miss out on it!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Dark Times - Fire Carrier #1

Feb 6, 2013

The recent slew of STAR WARS comics have all been top-notch, but 'Fire Carrier' is off to an only okay start. Although, it's worth noting it has the luxury of having 4 more issues to impress us. After all, I wasn't that fond of DEATH SENTENCE'S first issue and shortly after it managed to wow me. I'm really hoping the same will happen here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Maul - Death Sentence #3

Sep 26, 2012

This series has picked up a great deal after the first issue. You'll find yourself rooting for Maul, despite how twisted and terrible his intentions are, and there's more than a fair share of legitimately powerful moments. I can't wait for the next issue to see how everything unfolds, especially after that cliffhanger. Star Wars fans, you should be reading this!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Star Wars: Darth Maul - Death Sentence #4

Oct 31, 2012

Star Wars fans -- be it casual or expert -- should absolutely read this series. Taylor takes a brilliant look at Maul's deeply disturbing mind and crafts a standalone story that'll keep your intriuge the entire time. There's plenty of well written action to go around and more than a handful of dark moments that'll shock you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Maul: Son Of Dathomir #1

May 21, 2014

Barlow's debut issue isn't very plot heavy, but it does just enough to introduce us to the appealing cast it'll involve and hints at the road it'll take. Then there's the action, the oh-so-glorious action. That's really what sells this issue. Sure, I'm plenty excited to see where Maul's story in this era will take him and what kind of roles the other individuals will play, but right now, the creative team has made quite an impact with an incredibly fun battle and ends the issue with a remark that feels like it's speaking directly to the reader. The follow-up to Darth Maul's animated return is off to an entertaining start and definitely has a lot of potential.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Maul: Son Of Dathomir #2

Jun 18, 2014

STAR WARS: DARTH MAUL - SON OF DATHOMIR incorporates a great cast of characters and has the privilege of following-up a very exciting storyline from the animated series. Unfortunately, this second chapter's events feel mostly forgettable and instead leave us wondering what'll happen in the next chapter. It essentially feels like it's going through the motions to move the plot forward. There's most definitely some interesting developments and I'm anxious to see what'll happen next (how could I not be?), but the execution of everything feels somewhat generic. It's not bad and the artwork is consistent, but despite all of the events, nothing here really leaves a lasting impact. It's a shame because there's so much potential here. Still, you can't help but love diving back into the evil side of this universe and, even if the action scenes are short-lived, it's still pretty enjoyable while it lasts. Hopefully the next issue will be more engaging!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader and the Ninth Assassin #1

Apr 17, 2013

If you're picking this up solely to dive deeper into Darth Vader's story, you'll be hugely disappointed. He doesn't say a single word and instead oozes intimidation as he poses and occasionally wields a lightsaber. This issue merely sets up the very simple basics of the story and presents us with the key players. Seeing as this takes place before Episode IV, we know this seemingly awesome assassin won't succeed in his order to kill Vader. The only real question here is if his failure will result in death, some kind of escape from Vader's tight force grip, or if he'll simply just trick the man who hired him. Certainly not a bad debut, but not particularly compelling, either.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader and the Ninth Assassin #2

May 15, 2013

Only two issues in and it's clear this book is going for style over substance thus far. If impressive panels and a few explosions is your cup of tea, then give this a shot. However, I'm hoping chapter three greatly expands on the plot, otherwise I'm afraid I'm going to drop it. I can only afford so many $3.00+ titles, after all, and sadly, this isn't doing a whole lot to really enthrall me.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Purge - The Tyrant's Fist #2

Jan 2, 2013

Cramming a compelling story into just 2 issues isn't an easy chore, but overall, I'd say writerAlexander Freedhas succeeded in crafting a short and satisfying story. It absolutely won't usurp the phenomenal GHOST PRISON or DEATH SENTENCE, but it is indeed worthy a read and something worth the attention of any Star Wars fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Strange Nation #4

Jan 16, 2014

If you're looking for a good dose of creativity, sci-fi and fun, then I strongly recommend checking out this series. Considering it's only $0.99 an issue and they're legitimately engaging and a good time, catching up should be very easy.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Suicide Squad (2011) #20

May 8, 2013

This fresh direction is something both new and old fans are sure to love. We dive back into each character without it feeling like forced exposition because in this case, it actually serves a greater purpose. It doesn't feel like a 101 for each teammate or rehashing the basics. Instead, you're likely enjoying the greater scheme at hand and when you're hit with the reveal, it'll make perfect sense. Just one issue in and you can really tell Kot has big plans for this book. Throw in Zircher's art and I'm absolutely stoked to stick around for the ride. Welcome back to my pull list, SUICIDE SQUAD.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Suicide Squad (2011) #21

Jun 12, 2013

Issue 21 is fantastic and deliciously dark. After just two issues with the new creative team, SUICIDE SQUAD has become one of DC's most enthralling titles. Kot has a solid grip on the characters' unique voices and manages to deliver just the right dose of crazy fun action and, of course, mystery. Throw in Zircher's insanely good art and you're looking at a book with a whole lot of potential.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Suicide Squad (2011) #22

Jul 10, 2013

This issue comes as a double-edged sword. On one hand, Kot creates a super entertaining issue and it really is a blast. On the other hand, we know he'll be leaving the book after the next issue and after amazingly solid material like this, it's a bummer to see him go (no disrespect at all to Matt Kindt, of course). Regardless, his topnotch dialogue in combination with Zircher/Keith's art makes for an exciting read filled with surprising amount of laughs. And the most impressive part of it all? He followed-up all of that excellent comedy with one heck of a cliffhanger -- it's definitely a jaw dropper.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Suicide Squad (2011) #23

Aug 14, 2013

Ales Kot is leaving SUICIDE SQUAD with an explosion of craziness and laughs. From Deadshot resting his head on King Shark to Harley Quinn shattering the fourth wall to the most absurd drone strike you'll ever see, this is an issue overloaded with lighthearted goodness and a few subtle touches on just how morally messed up this whole scenario really is. The narrative he was building never really had an opportunity to soar to great heights, but man, he delivered a whole lot of fun in the process.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Suicide Squad (2011) #26

Dec 11, 2013

SUICIDE SQUAD is in the right hands and is awesome once again. Kindt's putting a strong focus on the absurd amount of manipulation that goes on at Belle Reve and it's generating plenty of gripping and twisted material. All of this is being brought to life in a wonderfully detailed manner by Zircher. Despite Quinn being a key player here, humor's pretty much cast aside and understandably so. When no one can trust anyone and bomb collars are involved, there isn't much to laugh about, is there? This book's definitely on the right track and should be on your radar. Hopefully we'll get to see more of the other characters soon enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Suicide Squad (2011) #27

Jan 15, 2014

SUICIDE SQUAD #27 feels like it was made just for new readers, which is odd since it's already well into the storyline and the issue's not being promoted as a jumping on point or anything like that. If you've been following the book, odds are the constant leaping from one origin story to the next will feel abrupt and make you wish there was more focus on the present. On the plus side, they still amuse and make a few key developments. I know there's a lot of characters in two completely different locations, but hopefully the next issue will be able to balance both groups well and take some big steps with the current timeline.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Suicide Squad (2011) #28

Feb 12, 2014

Kindt's run on SUICIDE SQUAD started off real strong but has unfortunately taken a bit of a dive in quality. With this issue, he finally puts all of the characters back together and what this creates is basically one large melee with just a few plot developments. It's not going to make you fall in love with the book all over again, but, for the most part, it's an alright step back in the right direction. There's isn't nearly as much forced exposition in here as the previous issues and, a lack of motion aside, there's some really strong artwork which is sure to keep you absorbed. The cliffhanger leaves me with a few questions, but instead of jumping to conclusions, I'd much rather wait and see what explanations Kindt will offer in the next chapter. It's not the most memorable issue around, but it's a fine does of fun and there's just enough intrigue to likely lure you into the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Suiciders #1

Feb 25, 2015

I went in with zero knowledge of the title), but it's instead looking like it could offer some clever commentary while astonishing your eyes with magnificent artwork. Brilliant artwork and a promising story. Yeah, I'd say this is more than worth checking out.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Supergirl (2011) #0

Sep 19, 2012

Issue 0 of Supergirl is a short and enjoyable read. It's a familiar story that widely plays it safe, but the invested look into Zor-El's heavy conflict and Asrar's art take center stage. This is certainly worth a purchase if you have any interest in the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superior Carnage #2

Aug 7, 2013

While this series probably won't turn you into a fan of Wizard or Klaw, Shinick has done a solid job creating a premise which has a nice grip on my attention. Carnage's lack of involvement is a tad disappointing, but I have a feeling that's going to change quite a bit over the next 3 issues. Throw in some truly impressive art and this is a limited-series that I'm definitely going to follow until the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superior Carnage Annual #1

Feb 5, 2014

If you're a huge fan of Cletus, then odds are this is going to make you beyond thrilled for what's to come. For everyone else, it's an amusing way to set things back to the way they were with the famous fiend and tease the future. Honestly, it doesn't come off as a mandatory read for DEADPOOL VS. CARNAGE because odds are these events will be swiftly summarized in the first issue's opening page. That said, if you have love for Cletus, it's a twisted and violent story worth experiencing.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Superior Foes of Spider-Man #6

Dec 11, 2013

If you're loving Fraction's HAWKEYE, there's literally no good reason why you shouldn't be reading Spencer's SUPERIOR FOES OF SPIDER-MAN. There's a tidal wave of great laughs in this issue and there's a big surprise thrown in there, too. I know the word "fun" has already been used twice in this review, but ultimately, the best way to describe this book is pure fun. Seriously, don't skip on this one -- it's a real blast.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Superior Foes of Spider-Man #8

Feb 5, 2014

Talking about Nick Spencer and Steve Lieber's SUPERIOR FOES OF SPIDER-MAN makes me feel like I'm spewing the same praise over and over again. Month after month, the series is consistently sharp, amazingly joyous and full of smile-inducing visuals. For the love of all that is holy, do yourself a favor and give this book a chance. It's a great dose of fun and that's something we all need in our lives.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superior Foes of Spider-Man #10

Mar 19, 2014

SUPERIOR FOES OF SPIDER-MAN #10 brings the gift -- of laughter! The usual team of Nick Spencer and Steve Leiber may have the issue off, but James Asmus and several artists prove they have what it takes to maintain the book's signature style. This may not move the plot forward and it's just more of these characters looking like fools, but you know what? It's a total blast and kept me chuckling the whole time. With so many dark and stern stories going on in the other books I'm following, it's so nice to have a series that aims to make you laugh and does it exceptionally well. Thanks for the good time, SUPERIOR FOES OF SPIDER-MAN.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superior Foes of Spider-Man #11

Apr 9, 2014

SUPERIOR FOES OF SPIDER-MAN #11 offers a nice set of visuals and ends on a strong note, but aside from featuring non-A-list villains, it doesn't really feel like another chapter of the book. The overflowing creative humor and feeling of originality just doesn't have a strong enough presence in this one. It's an amusing character study of a villain's mentality, but when all is said and done, you probably won't be able to shake the feeling this is ultimately a filler issue that just doesn't pack the same kind of brilliant punch as Nick Spencer and Lieber's issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superior Spider-Man (2013) Annual #2

Mar 19, 2014

If you find yourself especially invested in Ben Urich or the Goblin Nation's plot with Monster and Wraith, then yes, this is a comic you'll likely want to check out and will probably enjoy a little more than I did. But for everyone else, $4.99 is asking a little too much for what occurs in this comic. Sure, there's a development with Monster and Wraith's plot, but odds are this will be swiftly detailed in the next issue of SUPERIOR SPIDER-MAN's intro page or maybe even reduced to a line or two of exposition within the issue itself. It's an enjoyable annual and both halves certainly thrive for their own reasons, but nothing truly makes this feel like a mandatory read for fans of Goblin Nation, either.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superior Spider-Man Team-Up #10

Feb 19, 2014

This two-issue prelude story to Goblin Nation is definitely amusing, action-packed and looks good, but ultimately, being released after Goblin Nation's hit us with several reveals lessens the impact and this doesn't bring any seemingly mandatory developments to the table. If you find yourself really immersed in Superior's adventures or really love these three characters, then sure, it'll likely be a fun experience for you. However, for everyone else, you may be better off spending that $3.99 on another title.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superior Spider-Man Team-Up #11

Mar 26, 2014

SUPERIOR SPIDER-MAN #11 is an enjoyable trip into the past and has potential for a more serious and emotional second chapter. That said, I can't help but feel as though it doesn't do enough to make me really want to shell out $3.99 to see what happens next, especially when this comes off as a story that seemingly won't really change how we view either of these characters. It's by no means a bad issue, but I'd only recommend it to particularly big fans of these two Spider-Man villains.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superior Spider-Man Team-Up: Special #1

Oct 30, 2013

While the finale is definitely a creative course of events, it unfortunately comes off as feeling very safe and is bogged down by a whole lot of exposition. As of right now, it seems like this event won't carry over or play any kind of lasting role in the other titles (INDESTRUCTIBLE HULK, ALL-NEW X-MEN, SUPERIOR SPIDER-MAN). It's not a bad finale and I'm left feeling down the middle on it, but with a more expensive price tag on the cover ($4.99), I honestly can't recommend it unless you've really dug the previous two issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superman (2011) #30

Apr 23, 2014

Considering it's only $2.99, I'd say it's worth checking out for these very interested in Superman's current mythos and the upcoming event. For everyone else, you'll probably be okay just diving in with the first official chapter when Doomed drops.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superman / Wonder Woman (2013) #3

Dec 11, 2013

Soule successfully moves the overall narrative forward while also throwing plenty of variables into the mix. There's a lot of buildup in this issue and you can definitely feel all of the factors circulating. The cliffhanger's something we've all seen coming a mile away, but everything else has me incredibly anxious to witness how it'll all play out. With Daniel on-board, we know it'll be a good looking ride, too.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superman / Wonder Woman (2013) #6

Mar 12, 2014

Look, if you're part of the crowd that's very vocal against this relationship, odds are steam will shoot from your ears with this chapter (although, to be honest, I'm not sure why you're still reading it?). However, if you've been enjoying this run -- which appears to be more than a fair share of you -- then you're sure to be incredibly entertained by this issue. Not only is there a visceral slugfest, but the core of this one revolves around the dynamic between Superman and Wonder Woman. Sure, the ending seems designed to make some people question what's next (despite this taking place in the past...), but it still works because of the emotional moment the scene delivers and it absolutely leaves me curious to see how this will impact their relationship in the upcoming issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superman / Wonder Woman (2013) #7

Apr 9, 2014

SUPERMAN/WONDER WOMAN #7 will likely serve as a better read when it's collected in a trade or you have immediate access to the next issue. Because, just like it says on the cover, it's a prelude to the upcoming story Doomed. There's a little bit of emotional follow-up to the nuclear incident and it's nice to see these two out of their element, even if it's just for a little bit. But for the most part, this issue establishes a lot of questions and now it's just a matter of time to see how it's all handled. At any rate, that final page most certainly has me anxious to see what's next. Sure, the villain's hand emerging first is something we've seen so many times before, but given the action-packed nature of this book, I'm anticipating some massively fun brawls.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superman / Wonder Woman (2013) #8

May 14, 2014

While the first chapter of Doomed hit us with a massive slugfest, Soule's follow-up is purely character-driven and rightfully so. Instead of just having Superman act like a complete jerk and simply having some fun with it, Soule's able to tie this new mentality to the focus of this book: Kal-El's relationship with Wonder Woman. It's essentially a one-way argument since Diana's focused on helping him and not humoring his questions and accusations, but it's still a gripping bit of dialogue and hopefully these topics will reemerge. Throw in some consistently pleasing artwork and you have a solid second chapter of Doomed. Sure, the ending feels a little sudden, but it just goes to show how much Diana can help him in his time of need.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superman / Wonder Woman (2013) #10

Jul 9, 2014

The focus on Clark and Diana's relationship feels a little forced and the need to appeal to new readers takes a wee bit of a toll, but despite that, SUPERMAN/WONDER WOMAN #10 still manages to be an interesting and entertaining addition to the Superman: Doomed event. Not only does it cover a heck of a lot of ground, but it also gives us just a little more insight into how Clark is coping with his latest dilemma. It's just enough to help us appreciate what he's going through and it's still able to generate hype for what's to come. I don't know about you, but I definitely want to see what follows after that cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superman: Doomed #1

May 14, 2014

It's an okay start for the event, but I'll admit I'm still curious enough to see how this will all play out (especially taking into account what solicits have revealed). The story isn't all that gripping and the subplot isn't doing anything to standout, but the action was a blast and the upcoming development has my interest. With such a big cover price (there's 35 pages or so, but still, $4.99 is asking a lot when we have so many titles on our pull lists), I can only suggest that die-hard Superman fans should consider picking this one up.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Talon #9

Jun 26, 2013

When I finished the final page, I really didn't have any strong feelings about the issue one way or another. For me, this issue basically goes through the motions of doing everything needed before getting to the truly engrossing material. It's certainly not "filler," but it's instead mandatory exposition in some areas and swiftly introducing new elements in others. Overall, this is an experience that simply left me down the middle. If anything, I imagine it'll be a far more enjoyable read when collected in a TPB.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Team 7 #1

Oct 10, 2012

Just one issue in and I'm excited for what's to come. The cover makes this seem like it's an action fest ripped straight from the '90s, but the surprisingly sharp humor and excellent characterization makes this an issue worth buying. Team 7, I'm on-board for now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Team 7 #2

Nov 14, 2012

The cliffhanger, while obvious to many, is sure to appeal to longtime DC fans. If you find yourself dissatisfied with SUICIDE SQUADand want to discover another action based team book, then I wholeheartedly recommend giving TEAM SEVEN a chance. Jordan's more than ample writing with a diverse and interesting cast of characters is promising and it'll be especially interesting to see how he plays around with the early years of these individuals in The New 52.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Team 7 #4

Jan 16, 2013

TEAM 7's first journey has come and gone. There were some decent laughs and a fair amount of fun, but it's the cliffhanger that has piqued my interest. Justin Jordan is currently handling Slade Wilson over in DEATHSTROKE and it looks like Slade's earlier years are about to get a major emphasis over here now. I'm a sucker for a good Deathstroke story, so I say bring it on, Jordan!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Teen Titans (2011) #17

Feb 27, 2013

Ultimately, this is an okay issue that feels like its primary purpose is to set the stage for (hopefully) more exciting events in next month's chapter. They're juggling a lot of things and it definitely hinders the book's pacing, so I truly hope they have something great in store for us with each of those side plots.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #1

Aug 6, 2014

If director Jonathan Liebesman's reboot does well enough at the global box office to warrant a sequel, I'm really hoping the project will have a far more compelling narrative and take more steps to expand the mythos. All in all, this is a fun albeit mostly forgettable experience. The visuals, action, and humor are solid, but everything else comes off feeling pretty cliche. Oh, and if you do wind up strongly disliking the movie but still love the franchise, please remember the animated show on Nick and the IDW series are both consistently excellent!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #15

Oct 31, 2012

Kuhn's art might be off-putting to some, but please don't let that deter you from reading this book. There's some stellar (albeit brief) action in this issue and Slash's return takes center stage. There's certainly more to come with the character and it'll be especially interesting to see if they have to put him down... or if he'll become an ally. Furthermore, the plot with Shredder and Krang has only just begun and I'm very anxious to see how those two stories will unfold and potentially connect. This is a must read if you've ever considered yourself a Ninja Turtles fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #16

Nov 28, 2012

This is a great time to be a Ninja Turtles fan. We have not one, but two solid adventures from the classic franchise. The Nickelodeon show is shockingly good and thankfully the separate story unfolding here in the comics is every bit as enjoyable. IDW's reboot is a must read for anyone and everyone even remotely interested in the Heroes in a Half Shell. Do yourself a favor and get on-board now, then play catch-up with the TPBs.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #17

Dec 12, 2012

Those who turned their backs on this title because of the art should definitely reconsider their choice. The new art warrants giving IDW's reboot another shot. It's sporting a smoother presentation and there are far fewer awkward faces.Art aside, this new take on the classic franchise proves month after month that it's a blast and likely something any fan of the franchise (be it new or old) will love. It's worth noting that this can also function as a jumping on point. Though if you do, I still highly recommend eventually checking out the previous stories as they're release in TPBs.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #18

Feb 6, 2013

I hope writer Tom Waltz is having fun writing this because I'm having a helluva good time reading it! All of the pieces are finally coming together now (except for Slash and Old Hob, that is) and it's awesome to see they're all connecting to one elaborate story. Meanwhile, TMNT: The Secret History of the Foot Clan is implying a stronger connection between The Foot and the Utroms, so I wonder if we'll see more of that in the pages of this book. We know Karai is likely trying to look out for herself (there's no way she's okay with the thought of Leo taking her place), but what will happen when Shredder possibly finds out about Krang? And will we ever see the Technodrome in action or will the Fugitioid shut it down before it's operational? There's plenty going on in this book and it all has my interest piqued!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #19

Feb 20, 2013

I know some of you are probably shocked by the 3 star rating. I regularly praise this title and constantly give it 4-5 stars, but to me, this issue felt like a lot of filler (Karai aside, that is) and didn't really deliver with its final rush. Overall, it's an okay issue. I don't find myself reflecting positively on this issue... instead, I'm left anticipating how things will play out in the next one.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #21

Apr 24, 2013

With one good story after another, let it never be said that IDW isn't taking full advantage of this franchise. Tom Waltz and Kevin Eastman continue to do brilliant work with the iconic characters, paying tons of respect to the original material while incorporating big changes which make the series feel fresh. While this issue only does the bare basics to introduce 'City Fall,' it makes up for a lackluster plot with a crazy fun and lengthy fight sequence and Eastman's fantastic visuals. The twist won't drop your jaws, but you're sure to be hugely entertained as the Turtles struggle to defy the odds. This issue deserves to be in your collection, fellow TMNT fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #22

May 29, 2013

This is IDW's first big Turtles event and I'm so pleased to say the publisher is off to a terrific start. This is an absolutely superb way to kick things off because it's crafted in a manner that's perfect for new readers and for fans who have been following along since the very first issue. So, if you're one of the people who has been saying, "I want to read this but I don't know where to start or how to get the back issues," do yourself a favor and pick up this issue. Worry about catching up when you have time later, but for right now, you definitely don't want to be left in the dust. As of right now, this has all the makings of a must read story. IDW, thank you for continuing to make me fall in love with my favorite childhood franchise. You can't hear it from over there, but I'm giving you the best slow clap I can give.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #23

Jun 25, 2013

Tom Waltz, Kevin Eastman and everyone else clearly know what they're doing when it comes to TMNT's first big event and they're doing it masterfully. The first chapter lured us in with gorgeous visuals, fun action and a jaw-dropping cliffhanger. Now, the second chapter slows things down a tad to focus on moving all of the key pieces into place and once again delivers some great visuals as multiple TMNT artists provide some awesome pages. The momentum is quickly building up and by the time I finished the final page, I was insanely anxious to read the next issue. Despite being only two chapters in, I can say with full confidence that 'City Fall' is a must read for any TMNT fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #24

Jul 24, 2013

It's no secret I've been digging this series, but this issue really is something special. Call me crazy, but it doesn't feel like reading a comic -- it feels like watching a really fun movie. The combination of cinematic art, solid pacing, strong reveals and a tight script turns TMNT #24 into one of the most engaging and best issues from the series. Now if you'll excuse me, I'm going to go read it again and when you're able to, I strongly recommend you read it as well. And by "strongly recommend" I mean you really, really, really should if you're even kind of a fan of the Turtles.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #25

Aug 28, 2013

Everything is heating up this chapter and the next one has the potential for some massive and explosive payoffs. The team continues to make the heroes lovable and there's all kinds of exciting drama building up with the villains. Toss in two cheer-inducing reveals and even more praiseworthy art from Santolouco/Pattinson, and this is yet another excellent chapter of the book's first big event. At this rate, there's no denying "City Fall" could become one of the best TMNT stories. If I wore a hat, I'd tip it to the people over at IDW for creating this. But I don't have a hat, so hopefully this 5-star rating will express my appreciation just as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #26

Sep 25, 2013

The pace slows down a bit when we're with the "good" turtles and understandably so. This allows the storyline to expand even more and with all of these factors shuffling around, you can really feel the conflict is reaching a boiling point. Meanwhile, the slower pacing with some individuals is countered by some legitimately exhilarating action scenes that you simply cannot miss. Dark Leo, Splinter, Shredder... they all get some time to show off how talented they really are and it's downright awesome. To make matters even better, this is all presented with some truly praiseworthy artwork. 'City Fall,' can you do no wrong?!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #27

Oct 30, 2013

'City Fall' continues its streak of being spectacular. As a penultimate issue, there's a whole lot of story building, but what's truly great is we're not hit with a cliffhanger right when everything's about to go down. Instead, Waltz and everyone else involved make the smart decision to tease us with some epic action while still saving all of the big showdowns and conflicts for the finale. Oh, and that cliffhanger? It's sure to get you pumped. Bring on the conclusion!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #28

Nov 27, 2013

IDW's TMNT has been consistently solid but this story really is something extra awesome. If you have any interest at all in the franchise, it's your duty to read this story. I know I'll definitely buy the hardcover once it drops.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #29

Dec 18, 2013

Handling the fallout of City Fall certainly doesn't seem like an easy feat, yet the team at IDW has kicked things off with a strong first chapter. It's a much needed breather for the team after being hit by all of the chaos in the last story and Ross Campbell's art does a fine job reflecting that. This one's primarily character-driven, but by the end of the issue, it'll definitely leave you wondering where the overall narrative will go next. This book has yet to let me down and I just can't recommend it enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #30

Jan 29, 2014

This issue is guaranteed to put your empathy into overdrive and is one of the best character-driven issues yet. Each individual gets a more than fair amount of focus and they all have incredibly humanizing voices. Throw in Campbell's powerful imagery and you've got one heck of an effective issue. This was a great insight into each character and beyond recommend to any and all TMNT fans. Even if you missed out on City Fall, there's more than enough exposition here to fill you in (but seriously, get around to City Fall at some point). Now it's time to see how Waltz plans to switch things up in the next issue...

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #31

Feb 25, 2014

After a couple issues of reflection and insight, the team is shoved back into even more chaos. That said, Waltz does manage to deliver a couple of heartfelt moments before bringing some fast-paced action back into the series' pages . With the addition of some seriously beautiful visuals, a cool new mutant and a massively cheerworthy final page, this yet is another issue that any TMNT fan simply cannot skip.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #32

Mar 12, 2014

I've said it before and I'll say it again: man, I love IDW's Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #33

Apr 23, 2014

I'll be blunt: this is an issue every Ninja Turtles fan should pick up. Yes, it would be preferred if you could read the last two arcs first, but not everyone can afford that luxury and enough is done here to make this pretty new reader friendly. The team's back together and this issue delivers a whole lot of build-up. You can feel the tension rising and just enough is delivered to give you little teasers of what's to come. Plus, the shift to focusing on Casey gives the book a nice amount of heart and hopefully this is something that'll become a big factor as the story moves forward. To top it all off, artist Mateus Santolouco is back on the book, and the first scene should help you understand why I and so many others adore his work. This isn't a book that simply moves from one story to the next one without any repercussions. Everything this team has endured is adding up and it certainly shows in this issue. Seriously, don't miss out on this, TMNT fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #34

Jun 4, 2014

IDW continues to deliver pure fan service. They're able to give us what we want to see and include just enough change to make it feel like a totally unique experience. They aren't changes for the sake of changing things, either. You can tell they really respect the source material and want to apply practical and exciting alterations. Even though we've seen different incarnations of Metalhead before, this doesn't feel like more of the same and the result is an incredibly fun and superb looking issue. Plus, that ending is sure to make any TMNT fan count down the days until they can see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #35

Jun 18, 2014

TEENAGE MUTANT NINJA TURTLES #35 is a really good issue. It makes some major developments, looks consistently fantastic, and makes sure it always has the reader's attention. It manages to strike all of the right emotions, too. There's a gripping scene in the graveyard and the twisted situation in the apartment is surprisingly humorous. This single issue manages to bring quite a few changes to the universe, so I'm thoroughly excited to see where it'll go next with these characters! It's a shame Leonardo has been cast aside in this story, but it looks like the next issue is going to change that. Issues like this one prove it's a great time to be a fan of the turtles.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #36

Jul 16, 2014

TEENAGE MUTANT NINJA TURTLES' current story arc keeps getting bigger and bigger. Just when you thought the stage was set and we're ready to move forward, the team introduces totally new plot points and leaves us hanging on a cliffhanger that's pure fan service. Thankfully, the fast-paced narrative isn't leaving its characters in the dust. The team behind the story continues to focus on humanizing these individuals and this conversation between Leo and his father has been building for a little while and the experience was well worth the wait. Plus -- and it should really come as no surprise by now -- Santolouco and Pattison once again do a praiseworthy job with all of the panels. Now that the majority of the cast has received some proper attention, it's time to see what'll happen when the team finally decides to move forward with its plans. I've said it before and I'll say it again: this continues to be a series that every TMNT fan needs to follow.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #37

Aug 13, 2014

Who would have thought that one of the strongest issues of TMNT has literally nothing to do with the heroes in a half shell? This chapter is all about the villains and it's without question one of the most gripping experiences I've had with this series. With visuals that bring you right into the scenes and a terrific script, TEENAGE MUTANT NINJA TURTLES #37 is a seriously praiseworthy chapter in a consistently great series. If this issue doesn't get you interested in what IDW's doing with the franchise, I just don't know what will.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #38

Oct 1, 2014

TMNT's new arc is off to an excellent start. The team at IDW is doing a superb job delivering strong character moments and an interesting plot. To top it off, the artwork is wonderful and there's just enough fighting thrown in to feed the action junkies out there. And the ending? Any TMNT fan is going to have a huge smile on their face and an overwhelming desire to get their hands on the next issue as soon as possible. Seriously, if you have any interest in the franchise, you really need to be reading this book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #39

Oct 15, 2014

IDW's TMNT consistently proves it's a great, character-driven, and fun series. But if you've been reading along, you already knew that, didn't you? Tom Waltz, Kevin Eastman, and Bobby Curnow are doing incredible work with this franchise. They're taking so many familiar elements and themes but adding just enough to make it feel new, intriguing, and totally engrossing. The fact they have such a talented art team bringing their script to life doesn't hurt, either. Month after month, this series is excellent. Even if you're just a casual fan of the heroes in a half shell, I strongly suggest giving it a shot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #40

Nov 26, 2014

TMNT #40 is a massive amount of fun. They take the simple idea of Bebop and Rocksteady vs. everyone else and turn it into a total blast. It's funny and intense and the art team makes the whole experience a total joy to look at. If you simply want to enjoy a massive, animated brawl, you're going to get your money's worth and then some with this one. Sure, it feels like everyone else is being downplayed to boost just how tough Bebop and Rocksteady really are, but it's still such a good time. Oh, and that final page? It's sure to get any TMNT fan thoroughly excited.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #41

Dec 10, 2014

TEENAGE MUTANT NINJA TURTLES #41 is going to hook you. So much has been building up to this story arc and this first chapter really takes advantage of all of the plot points without slowing down the pacing. It has humor, heart, intrigue, tension, and even a little bit of action. Throw in the consistently solid visuals and this issue is going to leave you beyond excited for what's to come. Even if you're just a casual fan of the heroes in a half shell, you need to give this a chance. You'll find out this is more than worthy of your money. IDW has been doing brilliant things with this franchise and this new story is off to an incredible start. This Ninja Turtles fan is beyond pleased and I'm very, very anxious to see what'll happen next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #42

Jan 21, 2015

TEENAGE MUTANT NINJA TURTLES continues to prove it's consistently great and always manages to leave me thinking its future will be even better. Instead of offering simplistic stories and an abundance of action, the creative team has made the wise decision to really focus on character and story. Sure, there's all of the fun and silliness you'd expect from a TMNT story, but they're going all-out with the mythos building and creating a story that always has me wishing I could read the next issue right away. If you grew up with the franchise or just want to see why some people are so passionate about it, you need to read this story. It'll prove to you there's so much more to TMNT than just pizza and catch phrases.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #43

Feb 25, 2015

A number of small criticisms aside, TMNT #43 is yet another great issue in a surprisingly strong and consistently entertaining series. This latest arc has found an effective way to incorporate so many different characters and the end result is an adventure that has me completely hooked. I'm left wanting to read the next issue right away and, as I read the issues, I'm reminded why I love this franchise so much. Since the very first issue, it's been crystal clear this team loves the franchise and they're doing excellent things with it. I'm really looking forward to the next issue and even if the plot doesn't totally win me over, at least I know I can rely on Smith and Pattison to make sure it's a great experience for my eyes. TMNT fans, support what you love and buy this series. It's absolutely worth your time and attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #44

Mar 18, 2015

TMNT #44's a real jaw-dropper. It's a powerful issue that's able to balance fun, plot development, and emotion equally well. All of these moments are brought to life wonderfully by Smith and Pattison, but you'd expect no less from them at this point. It's the kind of issue that's going to linger in your memory and make you wonder about what'll happen in the next issue. Sure, I have some criticisms about the story and the biggest moment, but it's a huge and ambitious issue for this franchise. Even though it wraps up one arc in a solid way, it does more than enough to build our interest in what's to come. Seriously, don't miss this one, TMNT fans. And for the love of all that's holy, don't blatantly spoil it in the comments, okay? Use spoiler blocks, people!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) Annual: 2014

Aug 20, 2014

Honestly, I'm left feeling very mixed on this annual. First and foremost, the story has quite a few rough spots and has no strong connections to the current story arc. However, it is occasionally funny, expands the mythos in a fun way, and Eastman's art is a consistent joy (especially when Pattison's coloring is included). I found myself very torn between 3 and a 4-stars, but seeing as Eastman's art delivered regularly and this issue essentially embraces the franchise's earlier years, I'll side with 4-stars. I have my gripes, but overall, it did put a smile on my face every now and then and I had a blast looking at these pages. However, if you're not a big fan of Eastman's artwork and you don't want to read something that feels like a dated standalone story, I'd strongly recommend holding onto your $7.99.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Ghostbusters #1

Oct 22, 2014

Love Ghostbusters? Love Ninja Turtles? Yeah, you're going to love this. New fans may feel a little in the dark, but it's hugely satisfying if you've been following along. I can't wait for the next issue. Okay, I can, but I'd really prefer not to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Ghostbusters #2

Nov 26, 2014

This team-up is something I've been looking forward to for quite some time and it makes me so happy to see it's in such good hands. The creative team loves both of these franchises and that clearly shows. Seriously, I wish I had a time machine so I could give this comic to 6 year-old me; I think he'd freak out and love every single page.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Ghostbusters #3

Dec 24, 2014

TEENAGE MUTANT NINJA TURTLES/GHOSTBUSTERS #3 is a good dose of spectacle and banter. Sure, the material with Chi-You doesn't feel all that original or compelling and the plot isn't producing any jaw-droppers or noticeable twists, but the story brings about some exciting scenarios, lovable dynamics, and, of course, some incredibly good looking action sequences. It's looking like this limited series technically won't be mandatory reading to further appreciate either series (TMNT has already moved past this event and, sadly, the Ghostbusters no longer have a series), but that really shouldn't stop you from embracing something that's pretty much pure fun and has pages that are just oozing liveliness. I've alway

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Ghostbusters #4

Jan 28, 2015

TMNT/GHOSTBUSTERS #4 is pretty much popcorn entertainment that readers of any age can enjoy. There's a bunch of terrific looking action, the character dynamics are a blast, and while it may not drop any compelling twists, it wraps up in a satisfying way and absolutely celebrates both franchises. I had high hopes for this limited series and thankfully, it was every bit as fun as I hoped it would be. With dialogue this good and visuals this animated, part of me wishes there would be a fifth issue that consists purely of the two teams eating pizza at a table and just talking to each other. Maybe if we're lucky IDW will give these two groups another team-up at some point.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #1

Jul 10, 2013

Do you like the show? If the answer is yes, go buy this issue right now. Byerly does a tremendous job recreating the show's massively entertaining and lovable vibe while doing a superb job with the dialogue. Throw in the fact Brizuela/Breckel do a flawless job making the visuals feel just like the animated series and you've got a must read for anyone who loves the show. Seriously, if you dig the show at all, it's your duty as a fan to give this a chance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #4

Oct 23, 2013

And one more thing: Michelangelo's impression of Raphael is flaweless.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: 30th Anniversary Special (2014) #1

May 21, 2014

When there's already so many comics on your pull list, it's understandable to hesitate when you're considering an issue that has $7.99 on the cover. Obviously, casual fans will probably skip this because of the price tag, but this is something you should purchase if you really love the franchise. The short stories may not drop your jaw, but they're sure to hit you with some nostalgia and each one is entertaining in its own way. The journey ends on a surprisingly heartwarming note and then there's a pin-up gallery which is certain to have something for everyone. This is $7.99 well spent if you love the heroes in a half shell.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Secret History of the Foot Clan #1

Jan 9, 2013

If possible, I'd give this issue 6/5 stars. But I can't, so a flawless 5/5 will have to suffice. If you like TMNT or even consider yourself remotely interested in the franchise, do yourself a favor and pick this one up. It's a top-notch first issue with a phenomenal story and equally impressive artwork.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Secret History of the Foot Clan #2

Jan 23, 2013

Turtle fans, I really can't recommend this new series enough. The tragic news is it'll only be 4 issues. However, right now Its visuals are great, the story is phenomenal, and with just 2 issues in, the creative team has loaded it with tons of intrigue and adventure. It's diving into material that has been tackled a gazillion times before, yet it feels refreshing and is definitely something worth buying.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Secret History of the Foot Clan #3

Feb 27, 2013

Everything you're searching for when it comes to a Ninja Turtles experience can be found within these pages. It's funny, filled with fast action, rich in plot, looks great and has a huge cast of characters. You simply have to give this series a shot if you consider yourself a fan of the franchise.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Secret History of the Foot Clan #4

Mar 20, 2013

Loaded with fast action, hysterical interactions and a fantastic conclusion, this mini-series is a must read for any fan of the franchise. With 'City Fall,' just around the corner in the main title, this run does nothing but help build the hype for more of Shredder and I'm especially excited to see how things will go from here now knowing the huge changes to his origin. Despite owning the issues, this is without question a series I'll purchase again when a trade (or even a hardcore) hits because it's just that good.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Turtles in Time #1

Jun 18, 2014

For many of us, the title of IDW's latest limited series delivers a whole lot of nostalgia. The video game was full of amusement as it guided players from stage to stage. This comic is clearly aiming to deliver the same level of enjoyment value, and, so far, it's succeeding. It seems like each chapter will serve as a new "level" which places the heroes in a half shell in an all-new setting for an all-new standalone dose of entertainment. This debut issue is every bit as lighthearted and delightful as you'd want it to be. The artwork is beyond lovable and the story's a total blast. This is absolutely a must read for any TMNT fan that simply wants to enjoy an awesome serving of fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Turtles in Time #2

Jul 23, 2014

This limited series' second chapter is every bit as entertaining as the first -- but for totally different reasons, of course! While the debut issue was adorable and pure fun, this one takes a bit of a more emotional approach while never truly losing sight of the franchise's lighthearted nature. The trip to Feudal Japan is a massively satisfying addition to the team's new mythos and the ending is sure to stun you. TMNT: TURTLES IN TIME sure is turning out to be a great experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Turtles in Time #3

Aug 27, 2014

The story over in the primary series is getting seriously intense and the stakes are high, so it's nice to have TURTLES IN TIME for an overwhelming amount of lighthearted goodness. Just like the previous two issues, the objective here is to shed a little light on the specific era, give it a link to the bigger picture, and, of course, deliver some laughs and action along the way. Chapter three does each of these well, but it is a little bit of a bummer how the Turtles don't feel like stars in their own limited series and we didn't see very much of them actually battling pirates. That said, the script is humorous and fun, the artwork is incredibly pleasant, and the cliffhanger is very exciting.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Turtles in Time #4

Sep 17, 2014

TMNT: TURTLES IN TIME is a terrific ride through the franchise's interesting mythos and, if you're a TMNT fan, I absolutely recommend picking it up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Utrom Empire #1

Jan 22, 2014

If you're interested in Krang or the evergrowing TMNT universe, you should definitely pick this up. Allor's taking steps to expand the cosmic mythos while also establishing a whole new conflict. It's a solid, character-driven premiere issue and, to top it off, it leaves us legitimately guessing where it'll go next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Utrom Empire #2

Feb 26, 2014

It's simple: if you like the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles franchise, you should absolutely be reading this. Yes, the heroes in a half shell are taking a backseat (at least so far), but this limited-series is playing a critical role in expanding their universe and shows us how the franchise's roster is rich with potential.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Utrom Empire #3

Mar 19, 2014

TMNT: UTROM EMPIRE did exactly what it set out to do. It made Krang a far more compelling character, expanded the universe's mythos, and did a great job fleshing out a couple of the supporting characters. Now we just have to wait and see where this trio will appear next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thanos vs. Hulk (2015) #1

Dec 3, 2014

If you want to buy this issue because it's Jim Starlin writing and illustrating Thanos again, you'll likely be pleased with your purchase and will undoubtedly want to see what occurs next. The mad titan doesn't get that much time in this issue, but it's just enough to tease what's to come and Starlin does a nice job moving all of the plot elements into position. However, if you want to pick this up because you're expecting some epic action, you can likely skip this chapter and pick up the next one; I'm sure there will be an adequate enough recap page.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Deep #1

Jul 29, 2013

THE DEEP is a success thanks to playful writing and downright stunning art. This first chapter does a more than able job establishing the friendly cast and definitely makes me want to invest my time in their adventures. It's adorably lighthearted and absolutely seems like something people of any age can enjoy. With such a fun vibe, it's no wonder this is being turned into an animated show. If you're looking for a little break from darker and/or more serious material and just want to dip into a more amusing world, you should check out THE DEEP.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Deep Sea #1

May 22, 2013

The premise here didn't really solidify my interest for the long haul, but despite it not really luring me in, I still recognize it's a well-crafted comic and just because it isn't my cup of tea of course doesn't mean you'll share my feelings. The concept is certainly unique and, for all you know, it may be just what you're looking for if you're searching for a little departure from capes and tights. Seeing as it's only $2.99, I'd say it's worth checking out if you're curious.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Flash: Season Zero #1

Oct 1, 2014

THE FLASH: SEASON ZERO #1 is a good time. It offers an animated look at the upcoming show's world and keeps us entertained with amusing interactions and seemingly silly villains. It's not compelling or thought-provoking stuff, but it is fun. So, if you're really excited for the new show, you'll likely have an entertaining time reading this comic. Will it be enough to make you count down the days until the next chapter? Probably not, but when it does come out, you'll likely be interested enough to check it out and hope it's just as enjoyable!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Last Fall #1

Jul 16, 2014

THE LAST FALL #1 is a pretty exciting read that offers an engaging insight into its tragic lead. The universe may not be nearly as fleshed out as its main character, but the potential is certainly there and I'm hoping the plot begins to take more elaborate and interesting steps in the next chapter. Still, this debut issue succeeded in making me interested in Marcus Fall and I absolutely want to see where his journey takes him next. If you're a sucker for sci-fi wars, I'd recommend giving THE LAST FALL a chance. The overall narrative may not blow you away, but the action is a blast and odds are you'll establish a connection to the hero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Legend of Luther Strode #6

Aug 7, 2013

Jordan doesn't throw any twists or turns our way, but he definitely brings his A game when it comes to the dialogue and bringing some massively entertaining moments. There's an abundance of shockingly violent set pieces and scenes in this one. I know you've come to expect overloads of graphic violence from this title, but this is definitely way up there. As always, Moore and Sobreiro keep pace with Jordan's crazy script and do total justice bringing this madness to life. It's a tad too hectic at times, but overall, it's yet another great chapter in Luther Strode's life.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The New Ghostbusters #9

Nov 6, 2013

It's been well over a decade since I've jumped into the Ghostbusters universe and I'm happy to see that everything I loved about the movies and original cartoon is still here. Burnham has a script packed with heart, humor and distinct characters. To top it off, this is the beginning of a legitimately interesting plot, too. It's not merely a ghost with a simple and evil objective -- it's more complex than that and has me interested to see how it develops. Additionally, The art by Schoening and Delgado is beyond wonderful. Simply put, it's a great book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The New Ghostbusters #15

Apr 30, 2014

What you gonna buy? GHOSTBUSTERS! ...#15! But seriously, this volume is doing a tremendous job reminding me why I loved the movies as a child. Burnham continues to balance humor and the supernatural incredibly well and Schoening/Delgado's artwork is an excellent fit for the book's tone. It's animated and cartoon-ish, so it sells the lightheated material with ease, and the more intense and diverse situations are a total joy to witness. All in all, this story is feeling like a love letter to the classic films and I'm most certainly enjoying the ride.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The New Ghostbusters #16

May 28, 2014

IDW's GHOSTBUSTERS continues to prove one thing: if a third movie ever does move forward, they really need to bring on series writer Erik Burnham as a consultant. This book has renewed my love for this franchise -- a franchise I only enjoyed as a youngling -- and this issue is a perfect example of why I'm so captivated by it. It's funny, full of spectacle, and has praiseworthy artwork that pulls you right into all of the chaos. I'm definitely excited to see what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The New Ghostbusters #17

Jun 25, 2014

Even though Tiamat doesn't show her face (we all know we haven't seen the last of her, yes?), this an issue that's thoroughly entertaining form start to finish and feels like a proper continuation of the Mass Hysteria! storyline. Burnham sends the Goddess of Chaos back into the shadows and the team has to face new kinds of threats -- threats that'll definitely please fans of the movies -- and they have Tiamat's fingerprints all over them! GHOSTBUSTERS is a total blast and you can really tell that the creative team is pouring everything they've got into this latest storyline. Mass Hysteria! is ridiculously amusing and I cannot recommend it enough to fans of the franchise. Seriously, you'll like it even if you've only watched the movies.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The New Ghostbusters #18

Jul 30, 2014

GHOSTBUSTERS #18 is a bit of a mixed experience for me. It seems like so many potentially big and fun plot elements are swiftly resolved and, unless these have some major developments down the road, it almost feels like a filler issue as we await Tiamat's grand return. But, on the flip side, Burnham's script is still strong -- the characters have organic voices and it sounds like something their respective actors could deliver -- and, as always, the artwork impresses me on each and every page. Seeing as I'm left feeling so down the middle about this issue and it comes off as less compelling than previous entries, a 3 out of 5 feels appropriate. It's by no means a bad issue, but it does feel like a little bit of a departure from the book's usual delivery of exciting and hilarious developments. Despite that, I'm still left anxiously awaiting the next chapter!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The New Ghostbusters #20

Sep 24, 2014

Another volume of GHOSTBUSTERS comes to an end and I absolutely loved it. It may not be as "epic" as some expect, but it has a whole lot of heart and feels like a more than proper conclusion. Sure, it would have been great to see a little more focus on more of the characters (something which is countered in the very end), but the developments with Zeddemore are handled so well and there's still plenty of fun with the other three leads. There's a few laughs to enjoy, some ghosts and action to marvel at, and a surprising amount of emotion and optimism when all is said and done. Thanks for the great ride, Mass Hysteria! Now, bring on the TMNT crossover!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Valiant #1

Dec 10, 2014

THE VALIANT #1 is a pretty awesome trip into the Valiant universe and feels like it's the beginning of a story you won't want to miss. Not only does it expand Eternal Warrior's tale (unlike Joker, you'll know how Gilad got those scars) and give us a solid insight into Geomancer in a way that's friendly to new readers, but it also properly introduces a jaw-dropping antagonist and feels like the start of what'll hopefully be a very epic adventure which involves a number of the publisher's lovable characters. Whether it's violence, horror, or a laid back conversation between two characters, Rivera went all-out to make sure the visuals are every bit as good as the script. Love Valiant? Then you should have already read this by now and, if not, you need to go buy it right now. The exposition may be a little blatant at times, but it's still a very exciting start. Curious about Valiant? Go pick this up and see why so many of us have fallen in love with this universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Valiant #3

Feb 18, 2015

Fun action? Check. Well-written conversations? Check. Visuals that make you want to keep staring at the pages? Yeah, another check. THE VALIANT #3 offers a bunch of fan service and big action while also delivering on personality. And the best part of all? It all looks excellent. THE VALIANT is awesome and it deserves your attention, people. Seriously, unless you're completely against the idea of superhero comics, you should give it a shot. It'll be your proper introduction to this universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thor (2014) #4

Jan 28, 2015

THOR #4 is proof that Aaron knows how to balance this genre incredibly well. While much of this issue is action and reminding us that yes, this lead is indeed worthy, it also manages to incorporate a ton of character, some laughs, and one hell of a good plot twist. Readers of THOR: GOD OF THUNDER likely think there's zero mystery about who's wielding Mjolnir, but that's hardly taking away from just how fun this series is. With consistently strong visuals and a thoroughly entertaining script, THOR continues to win me over. It may not be as phenomenal as the previous run, but I have no problem watching this character's journey, especially if it turns out to be who many of us think it is (Roz Solomon)!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor (2014) #5

Feb 11, 2015

THOR #5 is full of laughs, clever commentary, solid artwork, and a whole lot of promising plot progression. It may not be as action-heavy as the previous chapters, but that hardly matters because the narrative and dialogue is handled excellently. This issue had me totally absorbed and I'm ready for the next one. It may be too dialogue-heavy for some, but I loved it and I'm left with no major criticisms. THOR #5 has it all. Unless you're strongly against the concept, you need to strongly consider buying this comic. It's worthy of your love, people.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thor (2014) #6

Mar 11, 2015

THOR #6 is an incredible experience for the eyes and there's plenty of enjoyable dialogue, but the handling of the big mystery will come as no surprise to pre-existing fans and it can feel a little heavy-handed at times. New readers will likely be surprised, but unfortunately, I'm not one of them. I also imagine they'll be a little confused since they don't know the character all that well just yet. Still, the combination of wonderful artwork, some well-crafted conversations, and several interesting plot points being put into motion makes this yet another issue that kept me thoroughly entertained and left me looking forward to the next chapter. I just hope they justify why this person has been attempting to hide their identity.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thor (2014) Annual #1

Feb 25, 2015

This is 100% lighthearted fun. There's no significant link back to the main story; it's all about embracing this fantasy world and having a crazy amount of fun with it. The opening story is mythos heavy and a little touching (it gives a brief update on future Galactus), the secondary story is cute and a little heartwarming, and the final one is all about purposefully over-the-top silliness and comedy -- it feels like a wacky cartoon. If you're cool with an issue that is focused purely on making you smile, odds are this might be worth your $4.99. Again, seeing as they're all delivering different kinds of comedy, I strongly recommend checking out the preview to see if this is something you'll appreciate.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #12

Aug 28, 2013

THOR: GOD OF THUNDER #12 proves this book can thrive without Gods battling and diabolical villains creating all kinds of chaos in the universe. Aaron offers a tight script, bringing a pleasant insight into modern Thor's character as he visits everyone from an inmate to an ex-lover. Based on the conclusion, it definitely seems this is Aaron's way of giving us an endearing course of events before we're hit by another wave of madness and villainy. I strongly recommend checking this one out. If you're not already a fan of the character, this holds the potential to turn you into one and it's a perfect jumping on point (although I do recommend reading THOR: GOD OF THUNDER #1-11 because it's thoroughly awesome).

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #13

Sep 18, 2013

It's very possible Jason Aaron was born to write a Thor book. The sense of adventure, the awe-inspiring scale, the mystical fun, the charming cast (villain aside, of course)... it's all present and in great quantity, too. Every scene had my eyes glued to the pages and I found myself completely immersed in Thor's universe the entire time. What's particularly important to note is this praise is coming from someone who tends to stray away from cosmic and fantasy books, too. THOR: GOD OF THUNDER is absolutely one of Marvel's best books right now. This is a jumping on point, so do yourself a favor and go get it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thor: God of Thunder #15

Nov 13, 2013

Jason Aaron continues to make THOR: GOD OF THUNDER one of Marvel's most delightful books. Malekith's material may not be all that gripping this time, but Aaron is completely killing it with everything else. The dynamic between Thor's team is a real joy to read and Aaron's doing an absolutely brilliant job with the script. Needless to say, I strongly recommend diving into Thor's world. Even if you've never been all that fond of the character, this book is sure to win you over.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #17

Jan 15, 2014

Jason Aaron defies expectations in this finale and the result is brilliant. It's not only a satisfying close to this story, but also a totally exciting tease for what's to come. The only negative is how much the art fluctuates from page to page. Aside from that, this is a wonderful and thrilling issue. I've said it before and I'll say it again: THOR: GOD OF THUNDER is easily one of Marvel's most entertaining books. If you're not a Thor fan, odds are this'll turn you into one.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #18

Jan 29, 2014

Jason Aaron's THOR: GOD OF THUNDER has been... well, magical. This is a standalone adventure, so there's no valid reason you could possibly have for not reading it. I won't lie to you, I've never even considered myself a big Thor fan or a fan of the fantasy genre in general, but Aaron turns the Son of Odin's life into something wonderful. It's an honestly enthralling read that's full of laughs and is sure to have you hooked. Throw in some legitimately gorgeous (albeit inconsistent) visuals and you have an issue that I absolutely recommend.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thor: God of Thunder #19.NOW

Feb 12, 2014

THOR: GOD OF THUNDER #19 is a jumping on point and I strongly recommend you do just that. While opening chapters can often feel overburdened by exposition and info dumps, Aaron's able to set the stage without ever letting go of our interest. That's thanks to some swift pacing, sharp writing, and of course, some legitimately grand artwork by Ribic. Seriously, you don't even need to be a Thor fan to fall in love with this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #20

Mar 19, 2014

This is yet another issue that'll make you exclaim "another!" once you finish it. Even though Aaron's hitting us with a serious overall message, he's doing it without being blatantly preachy and still manages to include a ridiculous amount of fun. THOR: GOD OF THUNDER continues to be worthy of a God. This issue is exceptionally well-written, loaded with excitement and packed with stunning artwork. Seriously, this is guaranteed to turn you into a Thor fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #21

Apr 16, 2014

THOR: GOD OF THUNDER is a phenomenal series and without question one of the best books currently available. The sheer amount of entertainment value Aaron and Ribic pack into this issue is absolutely ridiculous. The battle between King Thor and Old Galactus is tremendous, and the "battle" Thor faces in the modern era is a hilarious contrast yet still manages to feel completely epic. Throw in a solid cliffhanger and we have yet another issue that simply begs to be purchased. Be good to yourself and read this book. Seriously, it's that amazing.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #22

May 21, 2014

This series is ridiculously good. Aaron packs the pages with astonishing action as well as engaging dialogue and Ribic's artwork is tremendous. This is yet another issue that proves why THOR: GOD OF THUNDER is easily one of best titles out there. It'll make you laugh, drop your jaw, and by the time you're done, it'll make you demand the next issue right away.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #23

Jun 18, 2014

This chapter is loaded with explosive action and it's an issue that's both spectacular and cheerworthy. You can really tell this is a passion project for the creative team and the quality remains stellar. Aaron's cast is full of amusing banter, the action is magnificent, and the contrast between the two tales is excellent. I won't spoil the ending, but it once again provides a great contrast between the two eras. Aaron's work with this book is seriously impressive, and, luckily for us, he has a talented art team bringing it all to life. Ribic and Svorcina do a tremendous job making sure the visuals live up to everything the script has to offer and then some. Simply put, The Last Days of Midgard is an amazing ride and I just can't recommend it enough to every Marvel fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #24

Jul 2, 2014

THOR: GOD OF THUNDER #24 is the perfect way to wrap up The Last Days of Midgard. The story has been a ride that's full of non-stop excitement, and this epilogue is an insightful way to see what all of that action meant for everyone involved. It's far too often that stories dish out colossal damage and there's no real ramifications. This isn't the case in THOR: GOD OF THUNDER -- not at all. In addition to being a ridiculously well-written conclusion to one story, this issue is also loaded with attention-grabbing teasers. And then there's Agustin Alessio's artwork. To call it "impressive" really would be an understatement. I never was a huge fan of Thor, but Jason Aaron's run is brilliant and can't be missed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thor: God of Thunder #25

Sep 17, 2014

THOR: GOD OF THUNDER #25 feels like it should really be THOR #0. It's meant to help prepare readers for what's to come in the new series, not answer any of our questions or even offer any big hints about the identity of the new Thor. Simply put, it's primarily buildup and it's mostly captivating stuff. I adore the dynamic between the Goddesses of Thunder, so it was great having them serve as the leads for each of the stories. As for the short stories, they don't offer the kind of oomph we're used to getting from this series (how can one top the Gorr and Galactus conflicts?), but they're still interesting and obviously huge teasers for what's to come. Plus, young Thor slices a Frost Giant in half, so there's that. This may be the end of THOR: GOD OF THUNDER, but this chapter makes it clear that the new THOR volume will essentially be more of the same. If you've been reading along, you know that's definitely a good thing.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Thunderbolts (2012) #2

Dec 19, 2012

THUNDERBOLTS is without question the Marvel NOW! title I was the most excited about. I'm a sucker for this roster and how can I not be thrilled after those oh-so-fine covers? I don't just want to like this book, I want to love it. There's so much potential for the team, but right now the title hasn't done anything to wow me except for simply including a cast of characters I adore.The plot's fairly straight forward (which is perfectly fine for now), but the chemistry between characters isn't as sharp as it could be and the action isn't as energetic as it should be. Despite my jaw not being on the floor after this read, it was still a fairly amusing issue and it's still a title I'm going to follow. I just really hope it'll become more interesting.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Thunderbolts (2012) #3

Jan 9, 2013

THUNDERBOLTS pretty much feels like Marvel NOW!'s unsuccessful attempt at duplicating The Expendables. It's a roster of badass characters you love, there's an able dose of action but the story leaves a lot to be desired. Except here, the action isn't even that grand or even energetic. Because I'm such a fanboy of these characters, I'm going to see this story arc through to the end, despite my better judgement. I sincerely hope it improves or else this is a title I'll absolutely drop. I want to like THUNDERBOLTS and was so excited for it, but man, it's just a letdown.A bit off topic, but did anyone else feel like Deadpool and Rulk were hanging out with Sinestro?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Thunderbolts (2012) #30

Aug 27, 2014

THUNDERBOLTS #30 is a pretty fun journey which is complimented by equally fun artwork, but the characters' dialogue sometimes feels off and the physical conflict came off feeling really unnecessary. I get the symbolism behind the actions and how it was their way of addressing some issues, but it mostly seemed like fighting for the sake of fighting. On top of that, it's clear the story arc is going for over-the-top fun and the art works well with that, but it's odd when the narrative switches gears and aims for more serious and emotionally gripping scenes. It doesn't transition all that well into those and they're left feeling not nearly as impactful as they should. Still, if you're just looking to have fun, odds are you'll be able to overlook most of these issues and have a decent time.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
TMNT Villain Microseries #1

Apr 17, 2013

I've been more than transparent with my love for IDW's TMNT reboot. They've taken a more than familiar product and given it plenty of respect while making changes that feel fresh and interesting. The Micro-Series was a brilliant way to give individual characters some much appreciated extra attention and development and, up until now, I've loved every single one of them. Now, I know many on this site view a 3 star rating as a bad thing, but keep in mind, I view the star system as being like Netflix's -- a 3 means "okay," and, that's exactly how I felt about the issue when I was done with it. While it looks superb and the dialogue is sharply written, Krang's origin story is just a wee bit too out there for me for me to take seriously.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
TMNT Villain Microseries #2

May 22, 2013

TMNT fans, this is a must read issue. It's not critical reading for the overall narrative or anything along those lines -- it's just a simply awesome short tale. Burnham does a stellar job improving Stockman's reputation and making the character infinitely more fascinating. Meanwhile, Kuhn's unique visuals are a great fit for Burnham's tech heavy story and the end result is an issue any and every TMNT fan should read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
TMNT Villain Microseries #3

Jun 19, 2013

While this issue doesn't make me feel like Old Hob is anything more than a goon incapable of becoming a big bad, it's still quite an entertaining read and the artwork is remarkable. Plus, the ending is sure to make any TMNT fan anxious. All I'll say is once the origin story wraps up, we're brought back to the present and this cliffhanger will lead right into TMNT #23 aka part 2 of 'City Fall!' I'm sure it's not mandatory reading for the big story in next week's new issue, but it'll definitely help and give you a stronger connection to Old Hob -- a character who will clearly play some kind of role in the events to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
TMNT Villain Microseries #4

Jul 16, 2013

This micro-series issue accomplishes exactly what it set out to do: prove Alopex is an interesting character and worthy of her own issue. Before reading this, I wasn't sold all that much on the mutant, but a tight script, strong plot developments and solid visuals have made me do a total 180. If you're digging the current TMNT stuff, you definitely need to pick this up. Based on this chapter, it seems clear she may play a bigger role as 'City Fall' continues.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
TMNT Villain Microseries #5

Aug 21, 2013

"What can we do to make TMNT fans freak out in the best way possible?" That's likely the question that was posed before creating this issue, BECAUSE HOLY FAN SERVICE, BATMAN! Seriously, not only does this issue provide a more than compelling origin story for Karai, it also brings about an awesomely illustrated Karai vs. Dark Leo encounter and wraps up with one of the best teases ever for longtime fans of the franchise. I've said it before but I just can't say it enough -- now has got to be the best time to be a fan of the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles. IDW continues to pump out simply fantastic TMNT stories and if you dig the classic franchise, it would be a terrible mistake to miss out on what they're doing right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
TMNT Villain Microseries #6

Sep 11, 2013

Just when you thought 'City Fall' couldn't get any more interesting, IDW goes ahead and throws a new dynamic into the mix by totally reinventing Hun. He's not merely a man tossed into the universe to provide awesome brawls. Instead, he has a compelling connection to the heroes... one which he's totally unaware of. I can't help but wonder how long it'll be until the lies and deception come front and center because eventually the truth will have to come to the surface. When the lies do begin to fall apart, I'm very interested to see what that'll mean for the character and his potential future. This is yet another must read chapter if you're following 'City Fall.'

View Issue       View Full Review
10
TMNT Villain Microseries #7

Oct 30, 2013

The lovable idiots have made a triumphant return. Filled with big laughs and a staggering amount of action which ranges from lighthearted to jaw-dropping, this Micro-Series issue absolutely lived up to the anticipation. While there isn't much depth to these characters, Karai bluntly pointed out they're only good for two things: violence and destruction. While they're excellent for those two things and do them in a massively entertaining way, "comedy" should most definitely be added to her list. Now that they're being added to the mix, we can only imagine how explosive things will get once Karai utilizes them over in 'City Fall.' It's sure to be a blast.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
TMNT Villain Microseries #8

Dec 4, 2013

Even though City Fall was a Shredder-focused story, the ending made it crystal clear the publisher still has big plans for the character (and if you haven't read it yet, go do so right now). While SECRET HISTORY OF THE FOOT CLAN established his new origin and the primary series made him even more intimidating, this micro-issue does a remarkable job giving us a character-driven look at the infamous individual while also expanding his story. And, to top it off, there's some seriously pleasing melees in the issue. If you've already seen the star rating, then you should know by now that I strongly recommended this to anyone who has been digging IDW's TMNT.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers vs. G.I. Joe #1

Jul 23, 2014

TRANSFORMER VS. G.I. JOE is a dream come true for lovers of the early animated shows and classic comics. The creative team does a ridiculously good job making this feel like a comic taken from the golden era and reprinted for modern audiences to enjoy. Now, that's not saying it's blatantly dated and doesn't hold up! It has the kind of dialogue you'd see in many of the classic comics -- it sometimes embraces this for an intentional laugh -- but it never loses sight of its objective: to have a blast and deliver pure fan service. It definitely succeeds with that goal and will absolutely leave you wanting to see more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers vs. G.I. Joe #2

Aug 27, 2014

TRANSFORMERS VS. G.I. JOE is loaded with old school and over-the-top action. Looking at the standard cover really does tell you everything you need to know about this series. It has wonderful and cheerworthy Jack Kirby-esque visuals, classic characters, and the plot exists just to make sure these two sides clash as much as possible. It's silly, it's exciting, and best of all, it's a lot of fun. It's definitely not for everyone, but those who do appreciate this series are sure to smile a whole lot while reading it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Unity #2

Dec 11, 2013

The VeridctIf you're going to throw all of these characters together, you better make it worthwhile. Thankfully, Matt Kindt does just that and he's wasting no time at all with UNITY. The writer opens the book by talking about big moments in history and it's appropriate since this book has a ridiculously epic feeling going for it. The pacing is seriously impressive here. So many other writers could have pushed these events back one issue and spent t Not only is the comic moving full speed ahead, but it's doing so in an amazingly entertaining manner and is sporting some oh-so-lovely visuals, too. I just can't praise this book enough, people.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #3

Jan 15, 2014

UNITY has proven it's a great book and it's only on the third issue. The intensity never really slows down in this series, even when Kindt decides to dial back the action and focus on a lesser-known character. Then there's the hook for the next story. It's pretty much guaranteed to make you want the next issue right away. UNITY technically isn't a "big event," but it absolutely feels like a damn good one.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Unity #4

Feb 19, 2014

UNITY hasn't lost its charm; it still feels like a blockbuster movie. Matt Kindt is going all out with this one and Doug Braithwaite's art is just icing on this oh-so-delicious cake. Not only is Kindt able to juggle the roster well, but he's always keeping things moving. If he's not treating us to an epic action scene, odds are he's taking steps to move the overall narrative forward in order to keep things fresh. This is some damn good popcorn entertainment, people.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #5

Mar 12, 2014

"Everyone keeps talking about Valiant but I don't know what to pick up!" Well, this is a good place to start, random reader. Sure, there's a gazillion different (and not to mention affordable) collections that are available, but this is a beyond friendly jumping on spot and serves as a great introduction to what you can expect from Valiant's world. It's action-packed, well-written, looks commendable and has a cast of rich characters. Additionally, it does more than enough to motivate you to pick up the next chapter. It's a strong start to a brand new story and, best of all, it pretty much justifies why Ninjak deserves his own on going. But hey, Valiant clearly has big plans for the future and good things come to those who wait, right? At least we're getting plenty of his awesomeness here in Kindt's UNITY and, luckily for us, it's hugely entertaining team book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #6

Apr 9, 2014

Dr. Silk's plot may not be resonating with me all that much or wind up feeling quite as epic as it should, but despite that, this is still a very enjoyable issue and something any fan of the book will likely appreciate. Not only is it consistently pleasing on the eyes, but Kindt's able to shine a tight spotlight on Ninjak and Aric's morals. They're still a fresh group, so it's great to see them being handled as such. I may not be the biggest fan of the team's latest threat, but I sure am loving the reactions it generates from them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #7

May 21, 2014

When the stakes are this high, it's tough to really feel the tension or suspense because you know the worst-case scenario could never possibly happen. However, Kindt is still able to create an incredibly gripping and engaging storyline. Sure, the exposition hinders the pacing a little bit, but overall, this is a thoroughly enthralling chapter. He's able to deliver plot development, character, and really good action in just this issue. Throw in a visual team that clearly gives it their all on every page and you've got a great issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #8

Jun 18, 2014

This is a big issue of UNITY for two simple reasons: Bloodshot and the Armor Hunters! Bloodshot is given a thoroughly awesome introduction and we're also treated to a serviceable tie-in for Valiant's latest big event. For the most part, Kindt makes sure this can serve as a satisfactory jumping on spot for new readers and packs it with more than enough excitement to keep us around for the next issue. It's a little bit of a bummer we didn't get to see more of the Armor Hunters in action, but something tells me Kindt is saving all of the truly epic action for the upcoming rematch! Plus, how can you not want to see what'll happen next now that Bloodshot's on the team? I'm very curious to see how he'll interact with the others.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #9

Jul 16, 2014

UNITY #9 is an entertaining issue and attempts to offer a little more insight into a couple of characters. The pacing takes a bit of a hit as it tries to play catch-up with new readers, but if you've been following along, it'll still wind up being a satisfying experience and the ending will have you stoked for the next chapter. However, you likely won't be able to shake the feeling that nothing significant happened and technically this could be considered filler. Still, the action scene is uniquely executed and, even though the exposition begins to add up, it's still a fun ride.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #10

Aug 13, 2014

UNITY #10 offers thrilling action that's back-up by some solid artwork and a surprising amount of heart. Kindt has thrown these characters right into Valiant's latest big event and the end result is a legitimately exciting and even slightly emotional experience. Even completely new readers will be moved by the intro and the creative team does an effective job showing us just how much this event is impacting ordinary people and not just immortal soldiers and slick ninjas. It may not feel like a mandatory read, but it's definitely something worthy of your time and attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
V-Wars #1

Apr 30, 2014

I'm digging the premise and the story's potential, but as of right now, there isn't a very strong hook with the developments. I'm sure many of you will see the big twist coming a mile away, and, seeing as a lot of this is build-up, it's tough to feel very invested just yet. It's by no means a bad issue, but it leave a very strong impression with its debut, either. Basically, I'm sticking around because of the concept and I do believe the dialogue is well-written and it's keeping a tight pace. The potential is definitely there, so now it's a matter of seeing what'll happen next. If the premise sounds interesting to you, you should give it a shot.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Venom (2011) #24

Sep 5, 2012

Obvious Demon element aside, Monsters of Evil feels a lot like Circle of Four to me. This series has seen some stellar moments, but just like CoF, this story arc is feeling mediocre in comparison. Despite enjoyable artwork and a few laughs, I can't help but feel like this will wrap up quickly and we'll move on without these events truly holding a spot in our memories.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #25

Sep 19, 2012

Minor complaints about the combat aside, this was definitely an improvement over the previous issue and a solid conclusion that manages to construct the groundwork for something much bigger and hopefully, more epic. But, if you're a new reader looking to jump on-board Venom, I'd say wait for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #26

Oct 17, 2012

'Minimum Carnage' is picking up steam and this action filled issue has me anticipating the next chapter. The side cast is amusing (especially Bug) and the key players have their personalities coming out in full force. There's still a lot of questions surrounding the Microverse, but I have high hopes there will be plenty of elaboration in the next issue. Oh, and action. I'm sure there'll be a good dose of that as well. Bring on part four

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Venom (2011) #27

Nov 14, 2012

I wasn't the biggest fan when 'Minimum Carnage' kicked off, but man oh man has it ramped up. Radu has unfolded into an interesting antagonist, all of the characters are written well, and to top it off, it's just bloody fun. The ending also brings a nice (and somewhat needed) change of scenery to the (for a lack of better words) mini-event. This event has swiftly won me over and I'm really looking forward to the next chapter, particularly because it's sure to put a focus back on Scarlet Spider.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Venom (2011) #28

Dec 19, 2012

Now that all the evil magic and minimum craziness is out of the way, this feels like a refreshing start for Venom. I know Rick Remender did a phenomenal job on the run and those are big shoes to fill, but writer Cullen Bunn has done a superb job with this and the previous issue. I have no idea how Venom and Katy will get out of this predicament but if they both do, I really hope it's pulled off well. Because at the moment, there isn't exactly a whole lot of options to save the day.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Venom (2011) #29

Jan 2, 2013

(Spoilerly, so back out if you have't read this yet) We know when Flash loses control of the symbiote, he gets a significant physical upgrade (one that would make Brock-Venom blush). He ragdolled Carnage, he's busted down massive security doors -- the dude is simply a beast now when he lets loose. But is it really enough to overcome the U-Foes? I'm excited to see how he'll perform against them with a more brutal mindset, but I have a feeling he's still going to need Valkrie's aid to get out of this one. I just hope we'll get some solid plot developments thrown in with all of the chaos, too. It's an enjoyable story so far, but after last issue's emotional whirlwind, I couldn't help but feel a bit underwhelmed with this chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Venom (2011) #30

Jan 16, 2013

The struggle with the U-Foes more or less plays out exactly how you think it will. It's amusing and probably won't shock you, but the frequent and drastically different changes to the art in the issue takes away from the moments. That said, what comes after the battle is where the all of the truly interesting content takes place. Any Venom fan will get goosebumps from the cliffhanger and I love the character driven rooftop moment. It's just too bad the visuals fluctuate so much.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #31

Feb 6, 2013

This is the start of a new adventure for the latest symbiote host, and as expected, it serves as a great jumping on point as well. While this isn't a particularly explosive or exciting beginning, it does cover all the basics that we'd expect to see with Flash making such a big change in his life and there's definitely some fun to be had. Shalvey's work lacks detail at a distance but this is easily overlooked with some of his unique close-ups and how superb his Venom looks.Alright, Flash said his goodbyes and moved in to a not-so-fancy new place... now let's see some more of Eddie Brock/Toxin!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #32

Mar 6, 2013

It appears that teasing us with Toxin has finally come to an end. Brock has reached The City of Brothery Love and I imagine there's no real obstacle preventing him from encountering Venom in the next issue. That alone should make any longtime Venom fan count down the days until the next issue comes out. Bring on the symbiote on symbiote violence, Bunn and Shalvey!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #33

Apr 3, 2013

Crazy action? Check. Character development with Flash? Check. Pure eye candy from Shalvey? Check. If those points appeal to you, stop reading this right now and go buy the issue. And if you already bought the issue, go read it this second. Toxin vs. Venom has been hyped for quite some time now, so hopefully Bunn and Shalvey go all out in the next issue!Oh, and how awesome is that cover? Marvel, you need to turn that into a poster.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Venom (2011) #34

Apr 17, 2013

Based on the next cover, it seems clear the enemies will do the generic "we must team-up to defeat the greater evil" thing, but you know what? If it's half as fun as this issue and if Shalvey continues to bring his "A" game, I'll totally dig it. An engrossingly dark tone, frenetic action and a killer cliffhanger makes this a must read for any symbiote fan and my favorite issue from the series in quite some time.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Venom (2011) #35

May 29, 2013

This is yet another issue where writer Cullen Bunn and artist Declan Shalvey show off they're a great team for VENOM. The plot remains a tad light, but the ridiculously good visuals, impressively fun action and firm understanding of the key characters makes this a great read each and every time. While this does seemingly wrap up Toxin's involvement (for now, at least), this school melee has apparently created a whole new plot point to the book: Andi seems to know Flash's secret. If so, I'm definitely curious to see if Bunn will have Thompson come clean or desperately try to hold onto his secret.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Venom (2011) #36

Jun 12, 2013

While Bunn's narrative is good fun and establishes a decent plot moving forward (most notably with Andi), it's really Larraz's artwork which brought this one to the next level for me. He nailed it when it comes to making the symbiote look both formidable and badass and his nights fighting crime (even if it's just one panel) have such a cinematic feel to them. VENOM consistently delivers and you have no good reason not to check it out. This is a superb jumping on point, too.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Venom (2011) #37

Jul 3, 2013

Sure, I have some minor complaints here and there with this issue, but I'm telling you, VENOM just gets better and better. This issue shines because of some big plot developments, stunning visuals and a seriously entertaining action scene. Maybe it's because I'm a total sucker for lesser-known villains, but this storyline has me all kinds of excited and I totally loved it. I can't wait to get my hands on the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #38

Jul 31, 2013

VENOM #38 pretty much delivers what I wanted: more of Venom facing a sea of villains, deliciously gritty artwork whenever he's in the costume, and Andi is finally fleshed out and some major developments are made with the character. Seeing only glimpses of Venom fighting Lord Deathstrike and Constrictor feels like an abrupt tease, but what comes later makes it totally understandable why Bunn needed to limit the panels for those fights and it's well worth it. This may not be the best issue yet and I do have my complaints, but it's still a great dose of fun and something you should absolutely purchase.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #39

Aug 21, 2013

If there's one thing I can expect Venom to bring on a monthly basis, it's oh-so-fine looking art and some crazy, crazy action. Issue #39 absolutely has a more than ample amount of both, but the follow-up with Andi leaves me mixed. It walks an all-too familiar path yet despite that still does a somewhat refreshing job. Plus, Bunn's creative direction for Andi holds a helluva lot of promise. Let's just hope he has time to flesh it out and isn't forced to compact all of his goals due to a possible cancellation. Now we wait and see if VENOM's absence in the latest round of solicitations just means our Flash dose is being reserved for his appearance over in SUPERIOR SPIDER-MAN... or if it means his solo series is coming to an end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #40

Sep 4, 2013

So begins the end of VENOM. I know, I'm sad as well and I'm sure we'll have a thread to serve as a support group when the time comes, but at least Part 1 of 'Mania' is off to a promising start! There's more than enough mystery sprinkled in this issue and Bunn does an able job showing us where everyone stands while introducing a few new aspects. It truly sucks to see this book go, but at least it's looking like the final story will be a good one.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Venom (2011) #41

Sep 18, 2013

VENOM #41 takes a lot of large steps with the plot and throws a fascinating scene our way, but it still feels like there's a lot of weight left on the final issue's shoulders. One plot element (which I considered to be a big deal) felt like it received a pretty swift and abrupt conclusion, so I really hope everything else doesn't get a similar treatment in the final issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Venom (2011) #42

Oct 23, 2013

Ultimately, the final issue of VENOM comes off as feeling like the start of something promising instead of the end of something epic. Sure, the series technically ends on a bang instead of a whimper, but that's due to a ginormous action sequence and not progress with the plot. If Marvel actually has something underway for Andi and Venom in another series, then it'll be great to see how they run with this ending. But, seeing as there's nothing like that currently revealed to the public, I can't help but be slightly disappointed with this final issue. It's certainly entertaining and there's a nice focus on who Flash was and who he wants to be, but overall, it doesn't quite feel like a satisfying finale.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Wolverine (2010) #313

Sep 26, 2012

The conclusion of 'Sabretooth: Reborn' looks good, but the story is likely going to really, really, really upset, confuse or annoy long time Wolverine fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Wolverine (2013) #6

Jul 10, 2013

While it's true I didn't like this issue all that much, I am remaining somewhat optimistic because of the huge amount of potential the road ahead of us has to offer. Besides, it's entirely possible this will be a way better read when collected.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Wolverine (2013) #7

Jul 24, 2013

VerdictThis chapter strives for some heavy feels and brings in a lot of cameos to give extra perspective, but not all of the scenes work and while some are fairly somber moments, nothing here is likely to get the waterworks going. That said, one thing this book consistently does is revitalize my interest with each cliffhanger. Even if you agree this issue is just okay (or even worse), it ends on a note which is sure to keep most around for at least the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Wolverine (2014) #12

Aug 27, 2014

WOLVERINE #12 is an okay issue. It doesn't bring any new material to the dynamic between Wolverine and Sabretooth and, as you can see above, I have a lot of gripes with it, but it still delivers an alright insight into James Howlett, an amusing course of events, and the visual ride isn't bad. It's a bummer the back-up stories don't add any significant substance to the events in this conclusion and it'll by no means go down as one of the best Wolverine/Sabretooth stories, but I think relatively new readers will appreciate the character beats and find themselves interested enough to see what comes next. Here's hoping DEATH OF WOLVERINE is more compelling!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wolverine: Japan's Most Wanted #1

Jul 9, 2013

What this ultimately boils down to is whether or not this issue is worth $2.99. Despite the solid effort at switching up the reading experience and making it way more cinematic, this is still a relatively quick read. I'd say if you're a huge James Howlett fan or if you're really craving a sharp looking action tale, then yes, shell out the $2.99 and hopefully you'll dig it and find yourself wanting more when all is said and done. For everyone else, I can't recommend it being worth what they're asking for, especially when BATMAN '66 -- a comic which has a similar length and unique reading experience -- is a mere $0.99. I'd love to give this a 3.5/5, but since I can't give half stars, I'll round up because of the really impressive artwork. Seeing as I'm a total sucker for great visuals and action, I'll definitely be reviewing this again next Tuesday.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Wolverine: Japan's Most Wanted #4

Jul 31, 2013

Ultimately, this chapter is just one decent extended action sequence. The visuals remain awesome and are definitely the most appealing aspect of this title. Additionally, it's bookended by a new element in the plot -- one which has an intriguing cliffhanger. It seems clear this book exists to bring solid art and plenty of action, and that's something I am absolutely cool with. It's not quite up there with SAVAGE WOLVERINE, but it'll definitely suffice if you want more Wolverine in your life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Files Conspiracy: TMNT #1

Feb 19, 2014

As a huge fan of IDW's TMNT, it's great to see the team step outside its comfort zone. Sure, they're dealing with mutants and aliens in their own book, but the prospect of them interacting with an entirely different franchise is most definitely appealing. While this absolutely feels different than the usual that's going on over in their primary ongoing, there's still a sense of familiarity with how they're written and how the story's handled. Fellow fans of the TMNT run should definitely find this to be a very satisfying stand alone adventure. Whether or not this'll motivate them to keep up with X Conspiracy is a whole different story, though.

View Issue       View Full Review

Reviews for the Week of...

December

November

More